SC8000 - Advance U.S.

SC8000 - Advance U.S.
SC8000
Service Manual
Advance Models:
Nilfisk Models:
• 56108124 SC8000 1300 LPG
• 56108110 SC8000 48 LPG
• 56108120 SC8000 62 D
• 56108111 SC8000 48 LPG ECOFLEX
• 56108121 SC8000 62 D ECOFLEX
• 56108125 SC8000 1300 D
• 56108112 SC8000 48 D
• 56108122 SC8000 48 LPG ECOFLEX
• 56108126 SC8000 1600 LPG
• 56108113 SC8000 48 D ECOFLEX
• 56108123 SC8000 62 LPG ECOFLEX
• 56108127 SC8000 1600 D
• 56108114 SC8000 60 LPG
• 56108115 SC8000 60 LPG ECOFLEX
• 56108116 SC8000 60 D
• 56108117 SC8000 60 D ECOFLEX
• 56108118 SC8000 62 LPG
• 56108119 SC8000 62 LPG ECOFLEX
English
05/13 Revised 12/17 Form No. 56043167
Service Manual – SC8000
Contents
Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
General Machine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Service Manual Purpose and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Other Reference Manuals and Information Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Nilfisk-Advance Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Engine Manufacturers’ Technical Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Diagnostic and Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cautions and Warning Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Machine Dimensions and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine and Machine Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastener Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
11
11
11
12
12
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
18
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Service Materials . . . .
Daily Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Every 15 to 20 Hours . . .
Monthly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Every 150 Hours . . . . . .
Maintenance Every 400 Hours . . . . . .
Maintenance Every 800 to 1000 Hours .
Maintenance Every 2000 Hours . . . . .
Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
PM Check List - SC8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
General Machine Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Major Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Control Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Control Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
General Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Attention and Warning Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chassis System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Chassis Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
37
37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Control System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ii
Service Manual – SC8000
Contents
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Control Board (Driver Box) Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
J1 Main Control Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
J2 Main Control Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
J3 Main Control Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Control Board (Driver Box) Programming Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Foot Pedal Neutral Position and Deadband Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Presence Control (OPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
43
45
49
52
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Main Control Board Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Systems Disabled by Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
K1 Power Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
100-amp Fuse F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Callout – Relay PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/Output Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop Measurements - Driver Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop Measurements - Relay PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram - 56108185 Rev. A Sheet 1 Kubota LPG Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram - 56108185 Rev. A Sheet 2 Kubota Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram Kubota 1.6L LPG Engine 56107659 REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Harness Schematic, Machine - 56108186 REV A Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Harness Schematic, Engine Interface and Kubota Diesel - 56108186 REV A Sheet 2 of 2 . .
Engine System, Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
63
64
70
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
83
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Diesel Engine Starter Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Engine Air Filter Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Overheating Problems . . . . . . . .
Loss of Oil Pressure Protection . . . . . . . .
Engine Will Not Crank - Start Inhibit Active .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
88
88
89
89
iii
Service Manual – SC8000
Contents
Engine Stops Running - Run InhibitActive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Diesel Engine Will Not Run at High Speed or Turbo Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Troubleshooting the Kubota Engine Speed Governing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connector Callout – Relay PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Engine System, LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Kubota 1.6L LPG Fuel System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Start and Run Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Protection – Low Oil Pressure Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Protection – High Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
95
95
96
96
96
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
LPG Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Air Filter Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
101
101
103
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Engine Overheating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Shop Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electrical Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Valve Block/Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly Component Location Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
112
112
113
113
116
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Hydraulic Oil FIlter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information Regarding Checking Hydraulic Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Port Nominal Pressure Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Pressure Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
118
118
120
121
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
iv
Service Manual – SC8000
Contents
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Recovery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery System Hydraulic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
130
131
131
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Recovery Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Daily Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Recovery Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Scrub System, Cylindrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylindrical Scrub System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylindrical Scrub System Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
138
138
140
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Scrub Deck Leveling Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Scrub Deck and Right Side Scrub Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Scrub Deck and Right Side Scrub Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Scrub and Side Sweep/Scrub On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
147
148
149
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Scrub Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Scrub System, Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Side Scrub System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Side Scrub System Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
152
152
153
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Side Brush Tilt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Main Scrub Deck and Right Side Scrub Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Main Scrub and Side Sweep/Scrub On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
v
Service Manual – SC8000
Contents
Solution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solution Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detergent System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Scrub System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Side Scrub Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wash Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DustGuard™ Spray Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solution System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
162
163
164
165
165
166
166
167
To Clean the Solution Filter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Clean the Extended Scrub System Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Clean the Solution Delivery Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Clean the DustGuard™ Spray Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Adjust the DustGuard™ Spray Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detergent System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
176
176
176
176
177
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Main and Right Side Solution Valves and Solution Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Solution and Detergent Delivery Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Squeegee System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Squeegee System Wiring Diagram . . .
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . .
Squeegee System Hydraulic Diagrams .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
186
186
186
187
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Vacuum Fan On and Squeegee Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Vacuum Fan Off and Squeegee Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Steering Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Steer Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Sweep System, Side Broom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
vi
Service Manual – SC8000
Contents
Side Broom Sweep System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Side Broom Sweep System Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Single (left-hand) Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Dual Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
To Adjust the Side Broom Lift Actuator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Main Scrub and Side Sweep/Scrub On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel System, Non-traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
208
209
209
210
Brake Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Wheel System, Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piston Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foot Pedal, Hydroback and Rotary Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
212
212
213
213
214
214
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Piston Pump, Hydroback and Rotary Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Traction Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Foot Pedal/Hydroback Neutral Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Foot Pedal Neutral Deadband Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Push/Pull Control Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Hydroback Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Traction Drive Motor Hose Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Wheel Drive System Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
vii
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
General Machine Description
The SC8000 is an industrial automatic rider sweeper/scrubbers with multiple sweep/scrub single pass
coverage. All models use dual cylindrical scrub brushes with variable scrub pressure and solution flow rates.
Different models are available with front mounted side brooms (single and dual) and right side disc scrub.
Service Manual Purpose and Application
This Service Manual a technical resource designed to aid service personnel in maintaining and repairing the
SC8000 Sweeper/Scrubbers to ensure optimum performance and long service life. Please read it thoroughly
before servicing your machine.
Revision History
Revision Date
Description
8/14
• Electrical System – Wiring Diagram - 56108185 Rev. A Sheet 2, right side of image
was cut off. Repaired image to show the complete diagram
• Engine System, LPG – Clarified engine speeds and control. Added part number for
Kubota engine software CD. Clarified engine oil and filter maintenance intervals.
• Engine System, Diesel – Corrected wire colors in engine speed table. Clarified engine
oil and filter maintenance intervals.
12/17
• Updated hydraulic specification table
• Updated Kabuta wiring diagram
• Added procedure for leveling the scrub deck
Other Reference Manuals and Information Sources
Nilfisk-Advance Publications
Advance SC8000
• Part List - PL56042606
• Operator’s Manuals:
–– OM56091075 (English, Spanish, Portuguese-Brazilian, French)
Nilfisk SC8000
• PL56042607
• Operator’s Manuals:
–– OM56091076 (Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish
–– OM56091077 (German, French, Dutch, Russian)
–– OM56091078 (Spanish, Portuguese-Portugal, Italian, Greek)
8
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
–– OM56091079 (Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Slovenian)
–– OM56091080 (Slovakian, Czech, Polish, Hungarian)
–– OM56091081 (English, Turkish, Bulgarian, Romanian)
These manuals can be found on the following Nilfisk-Advance’s electronic supported databases:
• Nilfisk-Advance Dealer Customer Zone
• Advance website: www.advance-us.com
• Nilfisk website: www.nilfisk.com
• EzParts service/parts CD-ROM
Engine Manufacturers’ Technical Manuals
Engine Type
Manual Name
LPG
Operator’s Manual WG1605 EG523-89162ENG.pdf
Engine Specifications WG1605 9Y110-01770.pdf
Workshop Manual WG1605 9Y111-06610.pdf
Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf
Diesel
Kubota V1505TE Diesel Engine Operator Manual (English, French, German,
Italian, Spanish) - 16622-8916-3
Kubota V1505TE Diesel Engine Service Manual (English, French, German) 97897-01640
Kubota V1505TE Diesel Engine Service Manual (English) - 97897-02432
Diagnostic and Service Tools
In addition to a full set of metric and standard tools, the following items are required in order to successfully
and quickly perform troubleshooting and repair of Nilfisk-Advance Industrial floor cleaning equipment.
• Laptop computer loaded with current version of EzParts, Adobe Reader and (preferably cellular) internet
access
• Digital voltmeter (DVM) with DC current clamp
• Hydrometer
• Battery load tester for checking 6V and 12V batteries
• Automotive fuel pressure test gauge.
• Static control wrist strap
• Set of torque wrenches
• Hard (printed) copies of service manuals for regularly serviced machines (available at
www.advance-us.com, www.nilfisk.com and other Nilfisk-Advance websites)
9
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
These tools are also available from Nilfisk-Advance, Inc.:
• Vacuum water lift gauge, p/n 56205281.
• Engine service kit, p/n 56109084, includes an LPG Test
Kit, p/n 56504450, and a Diagnostic Communication
Cable and software, p/n 56305647 (Used on other
model GM Engines as well as Kubota LPG in the
SC8000. Kubota engine requires updated GCP display
software.
Engine service kit, p/n 56109084
LPG test kit, p/n 56504450
ECOM Diagnostic Communication Cable and software,
p/n 56305647
• Hydraulic test gauge w/connector, 3000 psi range, p/n
56504516
Hydraulic test gauge w/connector
3000 psi range, p/n 56504516
10
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Conventions
All references to right, left, front and rear in this manual are as seen from the Operator’s seat position.
Parts and Service
Repairs should be performed by an Authorized Nilfisk-Advance Service Center that employs factory-trained
service personnel and maintains an inventory of Nilfisk-Advance original replacement parts and accessories.
Call the Nilfisk-Advance Dealer named below for repair parts or service. Please specify the Model Number
(same as the Part Number) and Serial Number when discussing your machine.
(Dealer, affix service sticker here.)
Nameplates
The Model Number and Serial Number of
the machine are shown on the Nameplate
located on the steering column support,
and on a second Nameplate beneath the
floor plate attached to steering spindle
support.
This information is needed when ordering
repair parts for the machine.
Nameplate
Nameplate
11
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Cautions and Warning Symbols
Nilfisk-Advance uses the symbols below to signal potentially dangerous conditions. Read this information
carefully and take the necessary steps to protect personnel and property.
Danger! Is used to warn of immediate hazards that will cause severe personal injury or death.
Warning! Is used to call attention to a situation that could cause severe personal injury.
Caution! Is used to call attention to a situation that could cause minor personal injury or
damage to the machine or other property.
Read all instructions before using.
General Safety Instructions
Warning! Be sure to follow these safety precautions to avoid situations that could cause
severe personal injury.
• This machine should only be used by properly-trained and authorized persons.
• While on ramps or inclines, avoid sudden stops when loaded. Avoid abrupt sharp turns. Use low
speed down hills. Clean only while ascending (driving up) the ramp.
• Keep sparks, flame and smoking materials away from the battery. Explosive gases are vented
during normal operation.
• Charging the battery produces highly-explosive hydrogen gas. Charge the battery only in wellventilated areas away from open flame. Do not smoke while charging the battery.
• Remove all jewelry when working near electrical components.
• Turn the Key Switch off (O) and disconnect the battery before servicing electrical components.
• Never work underneath a machine without safety blocks or stands to support the machine.
• Do not dispense flammable cleaning agents, operate the machine on or near these agents, or
operate in areas where flammable liquids exist.
• To avoid hydraulic oil injection or injury, always wear appropriate clothing and eye protection
when working with or near any hydraulic system.
• The maximum rated incline for sweeping and scrubbing is 10.5% (6°). The maximum rated
incline during transport is 16% (9°).
• Only use the brushes provided with the machine or those specified in the instruction manual.
The use of other brushes may impair safety.
12
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Caution! Do not pressure-wash the operator control panel, electrical components or the
engine compartment area.
Caution! Be sure to follow these safety precautions to avoid situations that could cause
personal injury, damage to property or equipment damage.
• This machine is not approved for use on public paths or roads.
• This machine is not suitable for picking up hazardous dust or fluids.
• Use care when using scarifier discs and grinding stones. Nilfisk-Advance will not be held
responsible for any damage to floor surfaces caused by scarifiers or grinding stones.
• When operating this machine, make sure that bystanders, particularly children, are not
endangered.
• Before performing any service function, carefully read all instructions pertaining to that
function.
• Do not leave the machine unattended without first turning the Key Switch off (O), removing the
key and securing the machine.
• Apply the parking brake before exiting the Operator’s seat.
• Turn the Key Switch off (O) and remove the key before changing the brushes, and before
opening any access panels.
• Take precautions to prevent hair, jewelry or loose clothing from becoming caught in moving
parts.
• Use caution when steering and/or operating this machine in below-freezing temperature
conditions. Any water in the solution or recovery tanks, or in the hose lines could freeze, causing
damage to valves and fittings. Flush with windshield washer fluid.
• The battery must be removed from the machine before the machine is scrapped. Disposal of the
battery should be done safely and in accordance with your local environmental regulations.
• Do not use on surfaces having a gradient exceeding that marked on the machine.
• All doors and covers are to be positioned as indicated in the instruction manual before using the
machine.
13
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Jacking the Machine
Warning! Never work under a machine without safety stands or blocks to support the machine.
When jacking the machine, do so at the designated Tie Down/Jacking Locations
shown below.
Transporting the Machine
Caution! Before transporting the machine on an open truck or trailer, make sure the machine
is tied down securely at the designated Tie Down/Jacking Locations shown below,
all access doors and covers are secured (tape and strap as needed) and the parking
brake is engaged.
The jacking and tie down locations are identified with a graphic molded into the exterior
body panels.
Tie Down/Jacking
Location
Tie Down/Jacking
Location
14
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Towing the Machine
Caution! The machine’s hydrostatic drive propulsion system pump is manufactured with a tow
valve. This valve allows the hydraulic traction drive motor to “freewheel” when the
machine is being towed/pushed short distances without the use of the engine.
The tow valve is controlled by the Tow Valve Lever which is accessed by opening
and propping up the Engine Cover. Pull the Tow Valve Lever OUT to engage the fluid
bypass and allow the drive motor to freewheel before towing the machine.
Note that if the tow valve is left in the freewheeling position (Tow Valve Lever pulled
OUT), the hydrostatic pump can’t efficiently propel the machine in forward or reverse.
Attempting to operate the machine with the Tow Valve Lever pulled OUT can cause
overheating of the hydraulic system and/or reduced operating performance.
Tow the machine no faster than a normal walking pace (2-3 miles per hour/
3-5 kilometers per hour), and for no farther than 300 feet [100 meters]. Towing or
pushing the machine farther than 300 feet [100 meters] can cause machine damage.
If the machine is to be moved farther than 300 feet [100 meters], raise the front drive
wheel off the floor and place on a suitable transport dolly.
Engine
Cover
Tow Valve
Lever
15
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Technical Specifications
General Machine Dimensions and Capacities
Length
100 in [254 cm]
Height
58 in [147 cm]
Height (with overhead guard)
84 in [213 cm]
Width/frame (roller to roller)
56 in [142 cm]
Width (with rear squeegee)
57 in [144.7 cm]
Width (with right side scrub brush)
66 in [167.6 cm]
Cleaning path width (main brush only)
48 in [121.9 cm] deck size all models
Cleaning path width (with right side scrub brush )
60 in [152.4 cm]
Cleaning path width (dual sweep)
62 in [157.4 cm]
Main brush diameter and length
11 in x 48 in [27.9 cm x 121.9 cm]
Side scrub brush (right)
16 in [40.6 cm]
Side broom sweep
20 in [50.8 cm]
Solution tank capacity (3 inches from top)
100 gal. [378L]
Recovery tank (shutoff)
100 gal. [378L]
Scrub brush pressure (three settings)
(1) 150 lbs
Main brush RPM
400 RPM @2200 engine RPM
Debris hopper volume capacity
1.5 ft3 [.04 m3]
Debris hopper weight capacity
150 lbs [68 Kg]
Weight empty
2975 lbs [1349 Kg]
Weight GVWR
4135 lbs [1875 Kg]
Minimum aisle turn
119 in [302 cm]
Transport ground clearance
3 inches [7.62 cm] when in transport
Operator sound level @ operator ear
82.4 dBA @ 2200 RPM
Vibration level @ steering wheel
does not exceed 0.80 m/s
Certification
ETL
(2) 250 lbs
(3) 400 lbs
16
Service Manual – SC8000
Overall Dimensions
General Information
17
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Engine and Machine Performance
4-cylinder 1.6L WG1605 Kubota
LPG
Engine speeds
Idle - 1200 RPM
Normal Run - 2200 RPM
High Output Turbo - 2400 RPM
Idle - 1300 RPM
4-cylinder 1505 Kubota Diesel
Normal Run - 2200 RPM
High Output Turbo - 2400 RPM
Transport speed forward
8 mph [12.8 kph]
Transport speed reverse
3 mph [4.8 kph]
Grade ability – Cleaning
6° / 10.5% - all models
Grade ability – Transporting
9° / 16% - all models
Fastener Torque Specifications
Standard Torque
Specifications
(unless otherwise
specified)
Size
Plated Steel
Stainless Steel
#10
42 in.-lb.
28 in.-lb.
1/4“
100 in.-lb.
67 in.-lb.
5/16”
17 ft.-lb.
11 ft.-lb.
3/8”
31 ft.-lb.
20 ft.-lb.
1/2”
75 ft.-lb.
50 ft.-lb.
3/4”
270 ft.-lb.
180 ft.-lb.
M5
61 in.-lb.
36 in.-lb.
M6
9 ft.-lb.
62 in.-lb.
M8
22 ft.-lb.
13 ft.-lb.
M10
44 ft.-lb.
25 ft.-lb.
M12
70 ft.-lb.
40 ft.-lb.
Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Keep the machine in top condition by closely following the maintenance schedule. Maintenance intervals
given are for average operating conditions. Machines used in severe environments may require service more
often. In general:
• Keep the fuel tank filled (diesel). This helps to reduce condensation and moisture entering the fuel
system.
• Be aware of the yellow Attention Indicator light, the red Warning Indicator light and the liquid crystal
display (LCD) on the Operator panel for icons and fault codes that indicate a critical or non-critical fault
condition. Refer to the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) section for a listing and explanation of the LCD icons
and fault codes.
• Refer to the engine service manual for recommended engine service intervals and procedures.
18
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Recommended Service Materials
• Engine Oil (refer to your engine manual)
• Hydraulic oil (10W-30)
• Manufacturer-recommended coolant (antifreeze) 50/50 mix
• Lithium-base grease
• Loctite® (or equivalent) thread sealant in the appropriate grades
• Never-Seez® (or equivalent) anti-seize compound
Daily Maintenance
Caution! Do not pressure-wash the operator control panel, electrical components or engine
compartment area.
Maintenance Item
Procedure
Perform “After Use” maintenance steps
“After use” maintenance is normally the responsibility of the
machine Operator. Refer to the Instructions for Use.
Check the engine oil level.
Check the engine coolant level in the reservoir.
Engine
Check for engine and coolant leaks.
Check the air cleaner service indicator and service the air filter
when the indictor is shown red.
Operator control panel
Hydraulic system
Check for a hydraulic filter plugged icon on the operator panel
display.
Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil reservoir (level should be
to bottom of screen).
Check for any hydraulic leaks.
Check that the drain hose cap is sealed.
Recovery tank
Drain and clean the inside of the tank; flush with clean water.
Check the cover gasket for damage/wear.
Squeegee pick-up tool
Clean the squeegee tool; check the blades for damage/wear and
deflection.
Scrub housing side skirts
Check for damage/wear.
Scrub brushes, main and right side
Main and side brooms
Check for debris wrapped around the brushes/brooms and for
damage/wear.
Wet debris hopper
Clean the hopper, debris screen and hose.
Parking brake and foot pedal brake
Check for correct operation of brakes; adjust as needed.
19
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Maintenance Every 15 to 20 Hours
Maintenance Item
Procedure
Check the electrolyte level in the battery.
Battery
Check the battery cables and connections.
Solution tank filter
Inspect and clean the debris filter on the solution filter system.
EcoFlex detergent systems
Purge the detergent delivery lines.
Scrub deck skid plates
Inspect for wear (replace if worn to ¼ inch)
Scrub brushes
Rotate and flip the main scrub brushes.
DustGuard
Clean the dust control system spray nozzles.
™
™
Monthly Maintenance
Maintenance Item
Procedure
Squeegee caster wheel axle and pivot
Pump a small amount of grease into each grease fitting on the
machine until grease seeps out around the bearings.
Steering Rack
Angle adjustment knob threads on the
squeegee mount
Apply grease to lubricate.
Squeegee tool end wheels
Fuel Tank Cover Latch
EcoFlex™ / AXP™ Cover Latch
Apply light machine oil to lubricate.
Recovery tank latch
Brake Pedal (parking brake) linkage
Maintenance Every 150 Hours
Maintenance Item
Procedure
Engine maintenance
Change the engine oil and oil filter. *Also review the engine
manufacturer’s additional maintenance requirements.
Radiator and oil cooler
Inspect and clean the exterior core cooling fins.
Steering
Inspect and apply grease to the spur gear and rack.
LP fuel system electronic pressure
regulator (EPR) – LP engines only
Inspect and drain any oil buildup from the LP fuel system EPR.
20
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Maintenance Every 400 Hours
Maintenance Item
Procedure
Air intake housing and hoses
Inspect the complete air intake system for correct routing, kinks,
restrictions, sound tight connections, holes and cracks in hoses.
Hydraulic hoses
Inspect for leaks, wear, cracking and kinks.
Battery
Check electrolyte level; check terminals for corrosion, loose
connections.
Fuel Filter
Replace fuel filter cartridge (located before injector pump).
Replace the fuel filter at the electronic fuel pump.
Maintenance Every 800 to 1000 Hours
Maintenance Item
Procedure
Radiator
Flush and refill radiator with 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze.
Hydraulic oil reservoir
Change the reservoir oil and filter.
Maintenance Every 2000 Hours
Maintenance Item
Procedure
Engine maintenance (LPG and diesel
only)
* Review the engine manufacturer’s additional maintenance
requirements.
*Note:The engine maintenance schedule shown lists the recommended engine service intervals.
Refer to the Other Reference Manuals and Information Sources/Engine Manufacturers’
Technical Manuals section for list of available engine manufacturers’ service manuals. Refer
to these manuals for more complete maintenance and service information and instructions.
21
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Lubrication Points
Brake Pedal
(parking brake)
Linkage (oil)
Detergent
Cover Latch
(oil)
Steering
Rack (grease)
Squeegee
End Tool
Wheel (oil)
Fuel Tank
Cover
Latch (oil)
Recovery
Tank Latch
(oil)
Angle
Adjustment
Knob Threads
on Squeegee
Mount (grease)
Squeegee
End Tool
Wheel (oil)
Squeegee
Caster Wheel
Pivot (grease)
Squeegee
Caster
Wheel Axle
(grease)
22
Defect Codes
PM Check List - SC8000
Customer________________________________________________________
Address__________________________________________________________
Ciry_________________________ St________________ Zip______________
A Needs Adjustment
B Binding
C Contaminated or dirty
D Damaged, bent or torn
L Leaks
M Missing
W Worn out
Ref
Operational Inspection Items
OK
Defect Codes
(Circle)
1
Check drive pedal sensor operation (to test depress drive pedal and start
the engine, it should not start.)
2
Engine starting with pedal in neutral (if it will not start check pedal
calibration programming)
A B C
A
3
Engine idle speed, LPG/1200 RPM and Diesel/1300 RPM
A rough
4
Normal operational speed (run switch setting) 2200 RPM
A low
power
5
Turbo high-speed (hold 2200 RPM switch setting for 2 sec. to enter )
2400 RPM
6
Drive pedal linkage (check for Fwd/Rev drive and any neutral creep)
7
Drive system performance (max Fwd 8 mph)
8
Brakes
9
Steering
10
Right side scrub brush raise/lower (model option if equipped)
11
Right side scrub brush on/off (must have main scrub turned on)
B L
12
Side sweep broom(s) raise/lower (model option if equipped)
A B
13
Side broom(s) on/off
B L
14
Dust guard (sweep dust control) On/Off (model option if equipped)
15
Scrub system (Raise/Lower and auto scrubbing functions)
16
Main scrub brushes On/Off (will drift)
17
Scrub Brush (pressure settings 1, 2 and 3)
A B
18
Solution control (On/Off and flow volume min/max)
C D
19
Test and purge the detergent EcoFlex™ / AXP™ system (if so equipped)
20
Squeegee system (raise/lower and auto lift in reverse)
21
Vacuum Performance (Sealed water lift 34” @ 2200 RPM)
22
Headlights, gauges and (optional) accessories rotating beacon, backup
alarm
23
Tilt steering mechanism and seat adjustment lever
A B
Noisy sluggish
A B W
excessive play
B D L
A C L
C L W
C L
Does
Not
Work
Ref
Visual Inspection Items
Comments
min wear 3 inches
OK
Defect Codes
24
Side sweep broom(s) bristles
A B D W
25
Side broom motor(s)
26
Scrub brush motor(s)
Right scrub brush
B L
27
Main scrub brushes, check for wear and
rotate (1.75” length)
Min wear .875 inches
D W
28
Scrub deck housing and door skirts
29
Solution system pumps and solenoid valves
as many as four pumps
C D W
30
Solution tank, delivery hoses and filter
clean filter screen
C L M
31
Vacuum impeller motor and hose
32
Recovery tank screen and float
33
Recovery tank cover gasket
34
Recovery tank drain hose and cap
35
Squeegee pick-up hose
back flush
36
Squeegee tool and blades
clean and rotate
37
Squeegee casters, leveler adjustment knob
and linkage
grease
38
Hydraulic lift cylinders (squeegee, right side
and main scrub deck)
39
Battery
40
Engine, oil level, hoses and belts
41
Engine air cleaner element (inner and outer)
check service indicator
C L
42
Engine coolant level
fill at reservoir
C L
43
Radiator and oil cooler core blockage
clean
44
Hydraulic oil reservoir level (10W-30 engine
oil only)
to bottom of screen
45
Hydraulic system hoses and fittings
46
Propulsion (drive) pump dump valve (tow
valve)
47
Propulsion drive and accessory pump
L
48
Propulsion pump hydroback cable and
clevis connections
A B D
49
Propulsion pump hydraulic filter
C L
50
Diesel fuel tank, filter and lines
C L W
51
LP tank, hoses and fittings
52
LP fuel filter
53
LP fuel regulator, lock-off valve and hoses
B L
C D W
C L D
clean screen
B C
D L W
C D L M
C L
C D W
C W
B L
clean and water
C
C D L
C D L
C L
L
B D
L W
service life 1500 Hrs
C
L
54
Diesel glow plug function light
hard starting
55
Diesel fuel tank strainer
yearly
56
Brake cable
57
Circuit breaker panel
58
Front tire (check lug nut torque 100 ftlbs/135Nm)
59
Front drive wheel motor, steer spindle, rack
and cylinder
grease pinion and rack
60
Front and rear tires
tread wear
C
D M W
A
D L W
C W
Does
Not
Work
Service Manual – SC8000
Ref
General Information
Visual Inspection Items
Comments
OK
Defect Codes
61
Scrub housing debris hopper (tray)
clean
C
62
Scrub housing recovery hose and pick-up
screen
back flush/clean
C
63
Dust guard spray nozzles and strainers
clean
Defect Codes
C L W
A
needs adjustment
C
dirty or contaminated
M
missing
B
binding
D
damaged, bent or torn
W
worn out
L
leaks
Work Completed by:
Acknowledged by:
____________________________________
__________
Service Technician Signature
Date
____________________________________
Customer Signature
___________
Date
25
Does
Not
Work
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
General Machine Overview
Major Machine Components
Solution
Tank Fill
Cover
Engine
Cover
Operator
Seat
Recovery
Tank Cover
Engine Air
Filter Service
Indicator
Operator
Seat
Adjustment
Lever
Steering
Wheel
Recovery
Tank Tilt-out
Latch
Coolant
Overflow
Tank
Engine
Air
Filter
Recovery
Tank
Drain Hose
Fuel Tank
Cover
Latch
Recovery
Tank Tilt-out
Grip
Engine
Cover
Latch
Left Side
Skirt Latch
Fuel Tank
Cover
Left
Side Skirt
Headlight
Fuel Tank
(Diesel tank
shown)
Double Scrub
Skirt Holder
26
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Control
Panel
Circuit
Breaker
Panel
Brake Pedal/
Parking Brake
Steering
Wheel
Tilt Adjust
Lever
Drive Pedal
Direction/
Speed
Engine Oil
Dipstick
Detergent
Cartridge
Compartment
Oil Cooler
Tilt-out Latch
Hydraulic OIl
Reservoir
Filler Cap
Engine
Oil Filter
Right
Scrub
Skirt
Retainer
Knobs
Tow Valve
Lever
Engine
Oil Drain
(under radiator)
Battery
Squeegee Tilt
Adjust Knob
Right Scrub
Skirt Assembly
Solution
Filter
Right Side
Skirt
Engine Cover
Prop Rod
Right Side
Skirt Latch
Hopper
Squeegee
Mount
Wrench
Squeegee
Height
Adjust
Knob
Squeegee
Assembly
Solution
Tank Drain
Hose
27
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Control Panel Switches
• Horn Switch – sounds the
horn when pressed.
Horn
Switch
• Extended Scrub Switch
– enables the optional
extended scrub (recycle)
function.
Extended
Scrub
Switch
Detergent
Switch
Solution
Flow
Increase
Switch
• Detergent Switch – enables
and disables the detergent
system (on models so
equipped).
Solution
Switch
• Solution Flow Increase Switch
– increases the solution
flow rate one level when
pressed. Note that the LCD
will display the solution
flow rate (one to five bars).
• Solution Switch – enables
and disables the solution
system.
Solution
Flow
Decrease
Switch
Vacuum/
Wand
Switch
EcoFlex™
Switch
• Solution Flow Decrease Switch – decreases the solution flow rate one level when pressed.
• EcoFlex™ Switch – functions as follows:
–– On Machines Equipped with EcoFlex™:
The machine will default to the EcoFlex™ cleaning mode (the EcoFlex™ indicator will be on) to conserve
solution and detergent. Pressing the EcoFlex™ Switch temporarily overrides the EcoFlex™ cleaning
settings and does the following:
◦◦ Increases the scrub pressure to the next highest scrub pressure,
◦◦ Increases the solution flow to the next highest flow rate, and,
◦◦ Increases the detergent ratio to the next highest concentration.
The EcoFlex™ indicator will blink, and the scrub pressure, solution flow and detergent concentration
will remain at these higher levels for 60 seconds. After 60 seconds, the scrub pressure, solution flow
and detergent concentration will return to their previous settings, and the EcoFlex™ indicator will stop
blinking.
Note: Pressing and holding the EcoFlex™ Switch for two seconds enables the full concentration
detergent cleaning mode. The only way to re-enable the EcoFlex™ mode is to push the
EcoFlex™ Switch again. Cycling the key switch does not re-enable the system. The EcoFlex™
system will only function if the scrub system is enabled.
–– On Machines Not Equipped with EcoFlex™, the EcoFlex™ Switch is not functional.
• Vacuum/Wand Switch – enables and disables on the vacuum system.
28
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
• Left and Right Turn Signal – (optional) switch on the
corresponding turn signal.
Left Turn
Signal
• LCD (liquid crystal display) – displays the various machine
status icons and informational displays.
LCD
Right Turn
Signal
• Scrub On/Scrub Mode Select Switch – enables the scrub, solution
and recovery systems, and the side broom/brush system and
detergent system (if the machine is so equipped). Note that the
scrub brush pressure and solution flow will be at their lowest
levels. The scrub brushes will run, the solution will flow and
the squeegee vacuum will turn on when the machine begins
moving forward.
Pressing the Scrub On/Scrub Mode Select Switch with the
scrub system enabled will increase the scrub pressure and
corresponding solution flow one step each time the switch is
pressed.
• Scrub Off Switch – switches off the scrub, solution and recovery
systems, and the detergent system (if the machine is so
equipped).
• Side Broom Up Adjust Switch
– raises the side broom(s).
• Side Broom/Scrub On/
Off Switch – enables and
disables the side broom(s)
and/or right side scrub
system. Note that when
the side broom(s)/scrub
brush system is enabled,
the DustGuard™ spray
system will also switch
on automatically. Also
note that when the side
broom(s)/scrub brush
system is enabled, the
broom(s)/brush will return
to their last-used position.
Emergency
Flashers
(optional)
Scrub Off
Switch
Scrub On/
Scrub Mode
Select Switch
Headlight
Switch
Side
Broom
Up
Adjust
Switch
Side
Broom/
Scrub
On/Off
Switch
Side
Broom
Down
Adjust
Switch
• Side Broom Down Adjust
Switch – lowers the side
broom(s).
DustGuard™
Switch
Engine
Speed
Switch
Key
Switch
• Emergency Flashers –
switches on the emergency
flashers (if the machine is
so equipped).
• Headlight Switch – switches on the headlights.
• DustGuard™ Switch – enables and disables the DustGuard™ spray nozzles. Note that if the machine is
equipped with an extended scrub system, the DustGuard™ nozzles will shut off when the machine runs
out of clean solution.
29
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
• Engine Speed Switch – selects the engine speed as follows:
–– Pressing the switch with the engine idling (1200 RPM – LPG, 1300 RPM – diesel) will increase the
engine speed to the normal transport/scrub speed (2200 RPM).
–– Pressing the switch with the engine at normal operating speed will return the engine speed to idle.
–– Pressing and holding the switch for two seconds with the engine at normal operating speed will
increase the engine speed to the “Turbo” speed (2400 RPM).
–– Pressing the switch with the engine at “Turbo” speed will return the engine to normal operating speed
(2200 RPM).
Note: The SC800 has an automatic idle feature that will reduce the engine speed to idle when
the foot pedal has been in the neutral position for 20 seconds or more. The selected engine
speed will automatically resume when the foot pedal is moved from neutral. If the Engine
Speed Switch is pressed while in idle-override, the automatic idle feature will be temporarily
disabled until the next time the foot pedal is moved from the neutral position. This can be
useful during troubleshooting, or if you want to run the machine at full speed to warm it up.
• Key Switch – main power/ignition switch.
Control Panel Indicators
• Extended Scrub Indicator –
indicates that the optional
extended scrub system is
enabled.
Extended
Scrub
Indicator
Detergent
System
Indicator
• Detergent System Indicator –
indicates that the detergent
system is enabled.
Solution
System
Indicator
• Solution System Indicator –
indicates that the solution
system is enabled.
• EcoFlex™ Indicator –
functions as follows:
–– The indicator lights
steadily during normal
EcoFlex™ operation.
–– The indicator flashes to
indicate the 60-second
burst of power override
that increases of the
scrub pressure, solution
flow and detergent
concentration settings.
Vacuum/
Wand
Indicator
EcoFlex™
Indicator
–– The indicator switches off when the EcoFlex™ system is off and the machine is in the maximum
concentration detergent mode.
• Vacuum/Wand Indicator – indicates that the vacuum system is enabled.
30
Service Manual – SC8000
• Left and Right Turn Indicators – indicate that the
corresponding turn signal is flashing.
• Warning Indicator – lights in conjunction with
the LCD to alert the Operator of a warning or
fault condition.
• Attention Indicator – lights in conjunction with
the LCD to alert the Operator of a machine
condition requiring attention.
General Information
Left Turn
Indicator
Right Turn
Indicator
Warning
Indicator
(red)
Attention
Indicator
(yellow)
Scrub
Pressure
Indicators
• Scrub Pressure Indicators (1, 2 and 3) – indicate
the current scrub pressure.
• Side Brush/Broom Indicator
– indicates that the side
broom/brush system is
enabled.
Side Broom/
Brush
Indicator
Emergency
Flasher
Indicator
Headlight
Indicator
• Emergency Flasher Indicator
– indicates that the
emergency flashers are
switched on.
• Headlight Indicator
– indicates that the
headlights are switched on.
• DustGuard™ Indicator
– indicates that the
DustGuard™ system is
enabled.
• Engine Speed Indicator –
indicates that the engine is
at either normal operating
speed or “Turbo” speed. The
light will be off when the
engine is off or at idle.
DustGuard™
Indicator
Engine
Speed
Indicator
31
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
The LCD shows the total sweep/scrub time on the hour
meter, the fuel gauge, the current scrub pressure and the
current solution flow rate.
Hour
Meter
Dilution
Ratio or %
Scrub Pressure 1
Scrub Pressure 2
Scrub Pressure 3
General Displays
Extended
Scrub
Indicator
(optional)
Fuel
Gauge
If the machine is equipped with an extended scrub
system, the display will show the extended scrub indicator
when the system is enabled.
Solution Flow Rate 1
Solution Flow Rate 2
Solution Flow Rate 3
If the machine is equipped with an EcoFlex™ system,
the display will also show the detergent system icon and
current dilution ratio or percent.
Attention and Warning Displays
The driver box (main control board) will switch on the yellow attention indicator light or the red warning
indicator light and display the appropriate icon to communicate specific monitored operational (modes)
activities to the machine operator.
Attention Displays
Example: The main controller board shows the non-critical controller
fault code icon with a two-digit code (08) and wrench symbol. This is
a non-critical fault code that indicates the right side scrub solution
solenoid valve is over its current limit. The right side scrub system
will shut off but the rest of the machine systems will continue to
operate.
Icon
Condition
Solution Level Low
The float switch in the solution tank is
indicating that the solution tank is empty.
Fill the solution tank to clear the warning
indicator and icon.
Hydraulic Filter
Plugged
The hydraulic filter needs to be replaced
(serviced). Note that the oil temperature
must be above 100 degrees F for a
plugged filter to activate the icon. (This
prevents a false indication with cold oil
start-ups.)
Attention
Indicator
Display Icon
32
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Icon
Condition
Diesel Glow Plug
Start
The key switch is in the run position and
the glow plugs are activated (heating up)
for their timed 10 seconds. The engine
can be cranked to start when the yellow
attention light and display icon go out.
Controller Noncritical Fault
The driver box (main control board)
has sensed specific system component
failure(s) and displays a two-digit
number and the wrench symbol. See
the Control System/Main Control
Board Fault Codes for a description
of the fault codes and recommended
troubleshooting procedures. Note that
when non-critical faults exist, hour meter
will be displayed in rotation with faults,
Recovery Tank Full
The tank float has sensed a high water
level. The operator needs to empty the
waste water from the tank. If tank is
empty and the icon is displayed, service
(clean) the tank float (it could be stuck).
Also check the float circuit wiring for an
open.
Display Icon
300:1
Warning Displays
Example: The main controller board shows the engine service icon
with a two-digit fault code (38) and wrench symbol. This is a critical
engine fault code that indicates the main control board received a
run-inhibit signal from the ECM (LPG) or governor (diesel) that will
shut down the engine.
Icon
Condition
Parking Brake
Engaged
The parking brake is engaged. The icon
and warning light will disappear when the
Operator releases the brake.
Diesel Oil Pressure
Low engine oil pressure in the diesel
engine is sensed. Check for possible
causes for low oil pressure such as
engine crankcase level is low, incorrect
oil viscosity, fault in oil pressure switch
S28, excessive engine wear or defective
internal oil pump (relief valve). Note that
this icon display is for the Kubota diesel
engine only.
Warning
Indicator
Display Icon
33
Service Manual – SC8000
General Information
Icon
Condition
Engine Service
The Kubota 1.6L engines ECM
(electronic control module) has activated
an engine fault code. See the Engine
System, LPG / Engine Diagnostics
section for more detailed diagnostic help.
Battery Low
Low battery voltage. Check the alternator
output; test the battery; clean and tighten
the cables.
Controller Critical
Fault
The main control board has sensed a
specific system component failure(s)
and displays a two-digit number
with a wrench icon. See the Control
System/Main Control Board Fault
Codes section for code descriptions
and recommended troubleshooting
procedures. Note that some critical faults
will prevent the operation of certain
machine functions.
Hydraulic
Temperature
The hydraulic oil temperature has
exceeded an average operating
temperature greater than 220 degrees
F. for longer than 15 seconds. Possible
causes include low oil level in the
reservoir, debris blocking airflow at the oil
cooler or hydraulic component overloads.
Low Fuel
The fuel sensors read low fuel levels
from the liquid fuel tank (diesel) or low
pressure from the LP storage cylinder.
Refill the diesel tank (10-gallon capacity).
Replace the LP cylinder (33-pound liquid
capacity).
Engine Coolant
Temperature
High coolant temperature sensed has
caused and engine fault. Check for
low coolant level in the radiator, debris
blocking airflow through the radiator,
fan damage, loose fan belt, leaks, bad
engine water pump, engine overload at
high ambient temperature.
Display Icon
34
Service Manual – SC8000
35
Chassis System
Major Chassis Components
Front Hood
Rear Cover
Assembly
Floor
Weldment
Cover
Support
Assembly
Front
Floor Tank
Heavy
Bumper
Assembly
Chassis
Weldment
Service Manual – SC8000
Chassis System
Rear
Cover
Rear
Grille
Latch
Handle
RH
Latch
Heavy
Bumper
Weldment
Cover
Support
Weldment
36
Service Manual – SC8000
37
Control System
Functional Description
Overview
The Control System includes the Driver Box (main controller) and the Dashboard Panel. The Dashboard
Panel communicates with the Driver Box via a CAN Bus. The Driver Box controls the machine electrical
and hydraulic systems by actuating the appropriate pumps and solenoid valves to perform the required
scrubbing, sweeping and drive functions.
The Driver Box communicates with the Engine System controller on the Kubota LPG engine, and
the APECS 3000 Governor on the Kubota diesel to monitor engine parameters. The Driver Box also
communicates with the Relay PCB which provides the engine start and run signals.
Control System Wiring Diagram
Battery
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
2
B
3
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
Driver Box
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
Twisted Pair
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
J1-18
J1-5
2
1
Switch, Seat
Circuit Description
The Key Switch must be on to provide power to the Driver Box and Dashboard Panel. The Driver Box and
Dashboard Panel communicate over the CAN Bus.
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Component Locations
Dashboard
Panel
Main Control Board
Connector J3
Main Control Board
Connector J2
Main Control Board
Connector J1
Relay PCB
Start/Run
Inhibit
K1 Power
Relay
Driver
Box
38
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Control Board (Driver Box) Connectors
J1 Main Control Board Connectors
Pin#
Wire#
Color
Type
J1-1
18-1
GRA
Input
J1-2
20-1
BLK/YEL
-CANbus
User interface panel (membrane switches)
J1-3
20-1
ORN/BLK
+CANbus
User interface panel (membrane switches)
J1-4
J1-5
Engine control module output
Open
18-3
YEL
Input
J1-6
J1-7
Goes To
Seat Switch (EcoFlex™ only)
Open
18-1
GRA/BLK
Input
Fuel level sensor for either diesel or LP
J1-8
Open
J1-9
Open
J1-10
18-1
BRN/WHT
Output
Foot pedal position potentiometer (sensor
high)
J1-11
18-1
YEL/GRA
Output
Foot pedal position potentiometer (sensor
low)
J1-12
18-1
ORN/GRN
Input
Key switch ignition switch (run)
J1-13
Open
J1-14
Open
J1-15
Open
J1-16
18-1
RED/BLK
Input
J1-17
S29 Horn switch
Open
J1-18
16-1
BLK
ground
J1-19
18-1
GRN/ORN
Input
Sender hydraulic oil temperature
J1-20
18-1
VIO/WHT
Input
S6 Brake switch
J1-21
18-1
VIO/YEL
Input
S3 Solution empty switch
J1-22
18-1
WHT/BRN
Output
J1-23
Chassis ground X-49
Relay PCB (start inhibit pin# J7-3)
Open
J1-24
18-2
VIO/BRN
Input
Ignition switch start position
J1-25
18-1
GRN/YEL
Input
Engine control module (MIL output signal)
J1-26
J1-27
Open
18-1
GRA/YEL
Input
J1-28
S2 Recovery tank full switch
Open
J1-29
Open
J1-30
18-1
VIO/BLU
Input
Engine control module (engine coolant
temperature output)
J1-31
18-1
ORN/GRA
Input
Foot pedal position potentiometer (sensor
wiper)
J1-32
18-1
RED/YEL
Input
S4 Hydraulic filter switch
J1-33
18-1
BRN/BLU
Input
S7 Extend scrub level switch
J1-34
18-1
YEL/WHT
Output
J1-35
Relay PCB (ignition inhibit pin #J7-7)
Open
39
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
J2 Main Control Board Connectors
Pin#
Wire#
Color
Type
Goes to
J2-1
18-1
BLU/GRN
- Output
K1 power relay coil
J2-2
18-1
BLK/WHT
- Output
S8 side sweep scrub solenoid coil
J2-3
18-1
GRN/VIO
- Output
S9 side scrub lift solenoid coil
J2-4
18-1
YEL/BLU
- Output
S6 scrub cylinder lock solenoid coil
J2-5
18-1
RED/GRA
- Output
S2 squeegee down solenoid coil
J2-6
18-1
BRN/GRN
- Output
S3 squeegee up solenoid coil
J2-7
18-1
ORN/BLU
- Output
S4 scrub brush solenoid coil
J2-8
18-1
BRN/YEL
- Output
S1 vacuum fan solenoid coil
J2-9
Open
J2-10
18-1
BLU/YEL
- Output
L11 solenoid valve, right solution
J2-11
18-1
BLU/BLK
- Output
H3 back-up alarm (optional)
J2-12
16-1
ORN
+ Input
CB4 circuit breaker 20A
J2-13
18-1
WHT/ORN
- Output
K4 glow plug relay coil
J2-14
Open
J2-15
Open
J2-16
Open
J2-17
16-2
BLK
- Input
X49 control box ground
J2-18
16-3
BLK
- Input
X49 control box ground
J2-19
Open
J2-20
Open
J2-21
Open
J2-22
18-1
YEL/GRN
- Output
L10 solenoid valve, main solution
J2-23
18-3
GRN/BRN
+ Input
CB5 circuit breaker 10A
J2-24
18-1
ORN/RED
- Output
S7 scrub pressure proportional solenoid
(up)
J2-25
J2-26
Open
18-1
WHT/VIO
- Output
S5 scrub pressure proportional solenoid
(down)
J2-27
Open
J2-28
Open
J2-29
18-1
GRA/ORN
+ Output
X2 throttle input (12V 2200 RPM)
J2-30
18-1
GRA/BLU
+ Output
X2 throttle input (12V 2400 RPM)
J2-31
18-1
YEL
+ Output
LP6 left front turn lamp
J2-32
18-1
GRN
+ Output
LP5 right front turn lamp
J2-33
18-1
ORN/BRN
+ Output
LP4 left rear stop/turn lamp
J2-34
18-1
YEL/RED
+ Output
LP3 right rear stop/turn lamp
J2-35
18-2
GRA/ORN
+ Output
M6 extended scrub pump
40
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
J3 Main Control Board Connectors
Pin#
Wire#
Color
Type
J3-1
16-2
GRA/RED
+ Input
CB1 Circuit Breaker, 20A
J3-2
16-1
GRN/BLU
- Output
M4 solution pump
J3-3
Goes to
Open
J3-4
16-1
BLU/BRN
Output
M7 side broom actuator extend (red wire)
J3-5
16-1
WHT/RED
Output
M7 side broom actuator retract (black wire)
J3-6
Open
J3-7
16-1
GRA/VIO
M7 side broom actuator common (white
wire)
J3-8
16-6
BRN
+ Output
J3-9
16-1
GRA/RED
+ Input
CB1 Circuit Breaker, 20A
J3-11
16-4
BLK
- Input
X49 control box ground
J3-12
16-5
BLK
- Input
X49 control box ground
J3-13
16-6
BLK
- Input
X49 control box ground
J3-14
16-3
BLU
+ Input
CB2 Circuit Breaker, 20A
J3-15
16-2
BLU
+ Input
CB2 Circuit Breaker, 20A
J3-16
18-1
VIO
+ Input
CB3 Circuit Breaker, 15A
J3-17
18-1
WHT/YEL
+ Output
Horn
J3-18
16-1
YEL/BLK
- Output
M5 mist pump
J3-19
18-1
BLK/RED
- Output
M11 detergent pump 2 (AXP)
J3-20
18-1
BLK/YEL
+ Output
M11 detergent pump 2 (AXP)
J3-21
18-1
RED/BLU
- Output
M10 detergent pump 1 (AXP)
J3-22
18-1
RED/WHT
+ Output
M10 detergent pump 1 (AXP)
J3-23
16-1
BLU/RED
- output
M8 wand pump
J3-10
LP2 left and right headlights and taillights
Open
41
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Control Board (Driver Box) Programming Options
Foot Pedal Neutral Position and Deadband Adjustment
Factory Default: 3%
Range: 2% - 15%
Whenever you change or repair the drive pedal linkage components or the hydrostatic unit, or if you replace
the Rotary Sensor or Control Board (Driver Box), you will have to recalibrate the neutral deadband position
and set the sensitivity as follows:
1. Depress the foot pedal to the full reverse position, then allow the pedal to slowly return to its neutral
position. Do not move the pedal during the remainder of this procedure.
2. Press and hold the Engine Speed switch, then turn the ignition Key Switch to the run (on)
position. Continue to hold the Engine Speed switch until all the display panel lights turn off
(approximately three seconds), then release the switch.
• The first line of the LCD will read PEDAL CALIBRATION.
• The second line of the display will read Place Pedal in Neutral with an arrow to the left of
the line.
• The third line of the display will read Neutral Deadband.
3. Press the green Scrub On switch.
• The first line of the LCD
will read Neutral Set.
• The second line of the display will show the resistance value, in ohms, that the control
board is reading through the rotary sensor. Note that it’s normal for this value to drift a
little.
4. Press the green Scrub On switch to set the nominal deadband resistance value. The display will return
to the previous menu.
5. Press the Side Broom Down (-) switch to move the arrow to the left of the Neutral
Deadband line.
6. Press the green Scrub On switch to display the Neutral Deadband range menu. The
percentages shown are the limits the resistance from the rotary sensor can vary from
the Neutral Set (nominal) resistance and still be in the deadband range and allow the
engine to start.
7. Press the Side Broom Up (+) and Down (-) switches to scroll through the available
percentages.
Note: The ideal neutral deadband percentage range is one that allows reliable
starting, yet still actuates the scrub functions with minimal pedal travel.
The factory default value is 3%.
8. When the arrow is to the left of the desired percentage value:
• Press the green Scrub On switch to save the new percentage value. The display will
return to the previous menu.
42
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
• Press the red Scrub Off switch to return to the previous menu without changing the
percentage value.
9. Turn the Key Switch to the off position. The new settings will be saved and remain in effect
until they are changed again.
PEDAL CALIBRATION
Press and hold the Engine Speed switch, then turn the key switch on.
Place Pedal in Neutral
Neutral Set
XXX ohms
Indicates that the neutral position has been set after the
Scrub On switch is pressed. The bottom line displays the
resistance through the rotary sensor.
Neutral Deadband
2%, 3%, 4% . . . 15%
Selects the neutral deadband range - 2% to 15%
in 1% increments. The factory default is 3%.
Configuration Display Menu
Note: The Configuration Display will only display the active configured settings and fault
codes. You cannot make any changes to the machine configuration from the Configuration
Display Menu other than clearing the fault codes. See the Configuration Menu section for
instructions on how to change the machine configuration.
1. Press and hold the Emergency Flashers switch.
2. Turn the Key Switch to the run (on) position. Continue to hold the Emergency Flashers
switch until all the display panel lights turn off (approximately three seconds), then release
the switch.
The first line of the LCD will read CONFIGURATION DISPLAY.
3. Press the Side Broom Up (+) and Down (-) switches to scroll through the displayed
menu items as shown on the following pages.
4. When the arrow is pointing to a menu item:
• Press the green Scrub On switch to display the next level of menu items.
• Press the red Scrub Off switch to return to the previous menu level.
5. Turn the Key Switch to the off position to exit the Configuration Display.
43
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
Press and hold the Emergency Flashers switch, then turn the key switch
on. Configuration display only – no changes to configuration allowed.
Fault Codes
No Stored Codes
Will be displayed if there are no
stored fault codes.
View Fault Codes
Stored fault codes are displayed in a list. Display
format: XX (two-digit error code) and brief description.
Clear Fault Codes
Are You Sure?
Press the Scrub On switch to clear the fault
codes. The display will show “No Stored Codes”.
Engine Type
Undefined,
UndefinedPropane,
/ PropaneGasoline,
/ Gasoline
Diesel
/ Diesel
Detergent System
Installed?
Installed / Not Installed
Display Format
Ratio / Percentage
EcoFlex System
Installed / Not Installed
Side Scrub System
Installed / Not Installed
Side Sweep System
Installed / Not Installed
Extended Scrub System
Installed / Not Installed
Back-up Alarm
Installed / Not Installed
44
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
(continued)
Signal Lights
Installed / Not Installed
Display Screen
US Display / Global Display
Operator Presence
On / Off
User Interface Test
Pressing a control panel switch will light the corresponding LED
indicator to confirm that the switch and indicator are working correctly.
Turn the key switch off to exit the User Interface Test.
User Options Menu
1. Press and hold in the red Scrub Off switch and the green Scrub On switch.
2. Turn the ignition Key Switch to the run (on) position. Continue to hold the Scrub
Off and Scrub On switches until all the display panel lights turn off (approximately
three seconds), then release the switches. The first line of the LCD will read USER
OPTIONS MENU.
3. Press the Side Broom Up and Side Broom Down switches to scroll through the
options menu items as shown on the following pages.
4. When the arrow is pointing to the desired menu item, press the green Scrub On
switch to display the next level of menu options.
5. Press the Side Broom Up and Side Broom Down switches to select the desired option.
6. When the arrow is pointing to an option:
• Press the green Scrub On switch to select the option. The display will then return to the previous
menu level.
• Press the red Scrub Off switch to return to the previous menu level without selecting the option.
7. To save the new setting(s), turn the Key Switch to the off position. The new setting(s) will be saved and
remain in effect until changed again.
45
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Press and hold the Scrub Off and Scrub On switches,
then turn the key switch on.
USER OPTIONS MENU
Scrub System
Scrub Mode Start Up
Selects the scrub mode on startup.
Scrub Mode (1-3)
Last Used
Detergent Start Up
Off
On
Last State
Selects the scrub mode.
Scrub Mode (1-3)
Scrub Pressure
Minimum
Medium
Maximum
Solution Flow
Flow Rate (1-5)
Selects the solution flow rate for the
selected scrub mode.
Detergent Mix
300:1, 256:1, 200:1, 150:1, 128:1, 100:1,
64:1, 50:1, 32:1, 26:1, Last Used
0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 1.0%,
1.5%, 2.0%, 3.0%, 3.8%, Last Used
Neutral Off Delay
no delay
0.5 - 3 seconds
Solution in Reverse
Off
On
Selects neutral off delay time – 0.5 to 3
seconds in 0.5-second increments.
Depends on the
Display Format
selected in the
Configuration
Menu
46
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
USER OPTIONS MENU
(continued)
Recovery System
Squeegee Up Delay
5 - 30 seconds
Selects the squeegee up delay time –
5 to 30 seconds in 1-second increments.
Vacuum Off Delay
10 - 30 seconds
Selects the vacuum off delay time –
10 to 30 seconds in 1-second increments.
Recovery Timeout Mode
Normal
Neutral
Control Locks
Unlocked
Detergent
Detergent & Solution
Appears only when the Side Scrub
system is installed.
Side Scrub System
Start Up State
Off
On
Last State
Side Sweep System
Appears only when the Side Sweep
system is installed.
Broom Start Up
Off
On
Last State
47
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
USER OPTIONS MENU
(continued)
Side Sweep System
Appears only when the Side Sweep
system is installed.
Dust Guard Start Up
Off
On
Last State
Extended Scrub System
Appears only when the Extended Scrub
system is installed.
Start Up State
Off
On
Last State
Operating Mode
Use Anytime
Use Clean First
Engine Idle Delay
10 - 250 seconds
Back-up Alarm
Off
Reverse Only
Forward & Reverse
Headlights
Normal
Always On
Selects the engine idle delay time –
10 to 250 seconds in 1-second increments.
48
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Configuration Menu
1. Press and hold the Emergency Flashers and Headlight switches.
2. Turn the ignition Key Switch to the run (on) position.
3. Continue to hold the Emergency Flashers and Headlight switches until all the
display panel lights turn off (approximately three seconds), then release the
switches. The first line of the LCD will read CONFIGURATION MENU.
4. Press the Side Broom Up and Side Broom Down switches to scroll through the
configuration menu items as shown on the following pages.
5. When the arrow is pointing to the desired menu item, press the green Scrub On switch to
display the next level of configuration options.
6. Press the Side Broom Up and Side Broom Down switches to select the desired option.
7. When the arrow is pointing to the configuration option:
• Press the green Scrub On switch to select the option. The display will then return to the previous
menu level.
• Press the red Scrub Off switch to return to the previous menu level without selecting the option.
8. Turn the ignition Key Switch to the off position to save the new setting(s). The new setting(s) will be
saved and remain in effect until changed again.
49
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Press and hold the Emergency Flashers and Headlight switches, then
turn the key switch on.
CONFIGURATION MENU
Engine Type
Undefined
Diesel
Gas
Propane
Detergent System
Installed?
Not Installed
Installed
Display Format
Ratio
Percentage
EcoFlex System
Not Installed
Installed
Side Scrub System
Not Installed
Installed
Side Sweep System
Not Installed
Installed
50
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
CONFIGURATION MENU
(continued)
Extended Scrub System
Not Installed
Installed
Back-up Alarm
Not Installed
Installed
Signal Lights
Not Installed
Installed
Display Screen
US Display
Global Display
Operator Presence
Off
On
Restore Defaults
Are You Sure?
Press the Scrub On switch to restore the
default settings.
51
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Operator Presence Control (OPC)
The Operator Presence Control (OPC) feature that works in conjunction with the seat switch and parking
brake. The OPC can be enabled or disabled in the Configuration Menu.
OPC On
When the OPC is enabled, the machine functions as follows:
• When the seat switch is closed (Operator in the seat):
–– The machine systems operate normally.
–– Pressing the Vacuum/Wand switch toggles the Recovery system On and Off.
• When the parking brake engaged and the seat switch is open for longer than one second:
–– If the Scrub and Recovery systems are On, the machine transitions to the Wand mode.
–– Pressing the Scrub Off switch turns the Scrub system Off.
–– Pressing the Scrub On switch has no effect.
–– Pressing the Wand/Vacuum switch with the Scrub system Off toggles the Recovery system between Off
and the Wand modes.
• When the parking brake is released and the seat switch is open for longer than one second:
–– If the engine is running, it is switched Off by inhibiting the ignition and start signals.
–– If the Recovery system is On and the Scrub system is Off, the Recovery system transitions to the Wand
mode.
–– Pressing the Scrub Off switch turns the Scrub system Off.
–– Pressing the Scrub On switch has no effect.
–– Pressing the Wand/Vacuum switch with the Scrub system Off transitions the Recovery system between
Off and the Wand modes.
• With the seat switch open, the parking brake released, the engine off and the foot brake enabled, the
engine ignition and start signals are no longer inhibited.
• With the seat switch open, the parking brake released and the engine off, once the seat switch is closed
the engine ignition and start signals are no longer inhibited.
OPC Off
When the OPC is disabled, the machine functions as follows:
• When the seat switch is closed (Operator in the seat):
–– The machine systems operate normally.
–– Pressing the Vacuum/Wand switch toggles the Recovery system On and Off.
• With the parking brake engaged or released, and the seat switch is open for longer than one second:
–– The engine will continue to run.
52
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
–– If the Recovery system is On, it transitions to the Wand mode.
–– Pressing the Scrub Off switch turns the Scrub system off.
–– Pressing the Scrub On switch has no effect.
–– Pressing the Wand/Vacuum switch with the Scrub system off transitions the Recovery system between
Off and the Wand modes.
Troubleshooting
Main Control Board Fault Codes
Fault codes are organized by machine systems (functions). The red warning indicator or the yellow attention
indicator on the control panel will light, and the LCD will show a two-digit number and wrench icon. The
table below lists the main control board fault codes, and a description and brief comment for each fault code.
Note: C = Critical fault code, NC = Non-Critical fault code.
Code#
00 C
Fault Description
Solution pump(s) over current
Correction
• Check M4 main solution pump and M6 optional recycle
pump wiring for problems (on same fault line), M4 wire
colors (+GRN/BRN and - GRN/BLU) and M6 (+GRN/BRN
and - GRA/ORN).
• Check pump motors for short circuits, replace as needed.
00 C
01 C
02 C
03 NC
Extend scrub pump over current
Scrub brush pressure valve
solenoids over current
Main power relay K1 coil over
current
Wand pump over current
Check Pump motor M6 wiring for problems (+ GRN/BLU and
- GRA/ORN). Same fault line used for main solution pump
M4 and M6.
• Check L5 down and L7 up pressure valve solenoid coils
(on same fault line) for wiring problems, L5 wire colors
(+ ORN and - WHT/VIO) and L7 ( + ORN and ORN/RED).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 1.8 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub on and right scrub brushes deck pressure
electrical ladder detail and specs.
• Check K1 relay coil wiring for problems (+ ORN/GRN and
- BLU/GRN).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 36 ohms, replace. Also
see main power distribution electrical ladder detail. (Spec
.29A @ 12V.) Replace as needed.
• Check Pump motor M8 wiring for problems (+ BLU and BLU/RED).
• Check pump motor for short circuit, replace as needed.
• Test current draw - 12.5A full load max @12V.
04 NC
Side sweep mist pump over
current
• Check Pump motor M5 wiring for problems (+ BLU and YEL/BLK).
• Test current draw 3.9A full load max. Note: 24V pump
operating @ 12V.
53
Service Manual – SC8000
Code#
Fault Description
Control System
Correction
Check for 12V (+) from controller wire J2-29 (GRA/ORN) to
battery ground (-) with the engine speed switch 51 active.
Should read 12V.
05 C
2200 RPM no input @ ECM
• If 0V, troubleshoot the throttle wire. If still 0V, substitute a
good known controller and dashboard panel.
• If 12V and no 2200 RPM throttle response, test engine
controller output to specific throttle control G/LP/D. See
engine wiring diagram for additional help.
Check for 12V (+) from controller wire J2-30 (GRA/BLU) to
battery ground (-) with the engine speed switch 51 active.
Should read 12V.
06 NC
2400 RPM no input @ ECM
• If 0V, troubleshoot the throttle wire. If still 0V, substitute a
good known controller and dashboard panel.
• If 12V and no 2400 RPM throttle response test engine
controller output to specific throttle control G/LP/D.
07 NC
08 NC
09 C
10
11 C
12 C
13 C
Main solution solenoid valve
over current
Right side scrub solution
solenoid valve over current
Vacuum fan solenoid over
current
• Check L10 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and YEL/GRN).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub and right side scrub solution valves and
pump electrical ladder detail.
• Check L11 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and BLU/YEL).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 10 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub and right side scrub solution valves and
pump electrical ladder detail.
• Check L1 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ GRN/BRN
and - BRN/YEL).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see vacuum fan on and squeegee down electrical ladder
detail.
Not used
Squeegee UP solenoid over
current
Squeegee DN solenoid over
current
Scrub brush motor solenoid over
current
• Check L3 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ GRN/BRN
and - BRN/GRN).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see vacuum fan off and squeegee up electrical ladder
detail.
• Check L2 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ GRN/BRN
and - RED/GRA).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see vacuum fan on and squeegee down electrical ladder
detail.
• Check L4 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and ORN/BLU).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub on and side sweep/right scrub electrical
ladder detail.
54
Service Manual – SC8000
Code#
Fault Description
14 NC
Glow plug relay K4 coil over
current.
15 C
16 NC
17 NC
18 NC
Scrub cylinder lock solenoid
over current
Right side scrub/sweep motor
solenoid valve over current
Back-up Alarm over current
Right side scrub lift solenoid
over current
19 NC
Horn over current
20 NC
Left turn signal lamp over
current
21 NC
22 NC
Right turn signal lamp over
current
Head and tail lamp over current
Control System
Correction
• Check K4 relay coil wiring for problems (+ ORN/GRN and
- WHT/ORN).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 36 ohms, replace. Also
see diesel glow plug starting circuit electrical ladder detail.
• Check L6 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and YEL/BLU).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub on and right scrub brushes deck pressure
electrical ladder detail.
• Check L8 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and BLK/WHT).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub on and side sweep/right scrub electrical
ladder detail.
• Check optional back up alarm wiring for problems (+ ORN/
GRN and - BLU/BLK).
• Check horn for short circuit (spec 0.25A at 12V, electronic
alarm) replace as needed.
• Check L9 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and GRN/VIO).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub and right side scrub lift electrical ladder
detail.
• Check H4 horn wiring for problems (+ ORN/GRN and WHT/YEL).
• Check horn for short circuit (spec 4A @ 12V) replace as
needed.
• Check left turn signal wiring for problems (+ YEL and BLK).
• Check lamp for short (see the I/O table for circuit spec).
• Check right turn signal wiring for problems (+ GRN and BLK).
• Check lamp for short (see the I/O table for circuit spec).
• Check head and tail lamp wiring for problems (+ BRN,
YEL/RED, ORN/BLU and - BLK).
• Check lamps for short (see the I/O table for circuit spec).
23 NC
Left stop lamp over current
• Check left stop lamp wiring for problems (+ ORN/BRN and
- BLK).
• Check lamps for short (see the I/O table for circuit spec).
24 NC
Right stop lamp over current
Same as left stop lamp just different wire color (+ YEL/RED
and - BLK).
25 C
20A Circuit breaker CB1 over
current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB1 power
for head/tail and turn signal lamps. Check for GRA/RED wire
shorted to ground.
26 C
20A Circuit breaker CB2 over
current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB2 power
for mist pump (M5) and (M8) wash hose pump. Check for
BLU wire shorted to ground.
55
Service Manual – SC8000
Code#
Control System
Fault Description
Correction
27 C
15A Circuit breaker CB3 over
current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB3 power
for side broom actuator motor (M7). Check for Violet wire
shorted to ground.
28 C
20A Circuit breaker CB4 over
current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB4 power
for hydraulic solenoid manifold coils (L4 - L11). Check for
Orange wire shorted to ground.
29 C
10A Circuit breaker CB5 over
current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB5 power
for hydraulic solenoid manifold coils (L1, L2 and L3) also
Pumps M4 and M6. Check for GRN/BRN wire shorted to
ground.
30
Side sweep lift actuator over
current
• Three wires supply power to the M7 side broom lift
actuator motor; check wiring for problems. Wire colors
J3-4 BLU/RED (+) DN otherwise open, J3-5 WHT/RED
(-) UP otherwise open, J3-7 GRA/VIO common wire + UP
and - DN.
• Test current draw full load 20A ± 2A max.
• Check for frozen or binding lift linkage. Repair/replace as
needed.
31 NC
Detergent pump #1 over current
• Check #1 detergent pump M10 and #2 detergent pump
M11 wiring for problems, #1 pump wire colors (+RED/WHT
and - RED/BLU), #2 (+ BLK/YEL and - BLK/RED).
• Check pump motors for short circuit replace as needed.
32 NC
Detergent pump #2 over current
See pump #1
33 C
Engine hot fault
Coolant temperature high - causes engine fault, sets on
diesel machine only.
34 C
Hydraulic temperature fault
Sets when hydraulic oil temperature exceeds 220 F for 15
seconds.
35 C
Low voltage fault (battery)
One of the red display panel warning indicator lights. See the
explanation for the warning icon in the General Information/
Warning Displays section.
Service engine fault
LPG engine (Kubota 1.6) only, sets when ECM activates
MIL output - could be for many different reasons. See the
Engine System, LPG section for the list of engine codes
and process for reading (extracting) codes.
Low oil pressure fault
Diesel only - causes engine fault to set. The red warning
indicator will light and the LCD will display the Low Oil
Pressure Icon.
Engine fault
Occurs if engine temperature too high (diesel), oil pressure
low (diesel), or engine run has changed to ignition inhibit
and key is on (LPG). Note: Engines will shut down. See the
corresponding Engine section for a list of engine codes and
how to read (extract) the codes.
Hydraulic filter fault
Sets to warn operator that oil filter is plugged and needs to
be replaced. Note: Only activates when oil temperature is
above 100 degrees F (this prevents false signal upon cold
engine start-up).
36 NC
37 C
38 C
39 NC
56
Service Manual – SC8000
Control System
Systems Disabled by Faults
The following table lists the systems that are disabled for each displayed fault code.
01
Scrub brush pressure valve
solenoids over current (L5 and L7)
02
Main power relay K1 over current
03
Wash hose pump M8 over current
04
DustGuard™ mist pump M5 over
current
05
No speed input 2200 RPM @ ECM
06
No speed input 2400 RPM @ ECM
07
Main solution solenoid valve L10
over current
08
Right side scrub solution solenoid
L11 over current
09
Vacuum fan solenoid L1 over current
10
Not used
11
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Squeegee UP solenoid L3 over
current
X
X
X
X
12
Squeegee DOWN solenoid L2 over
current
X
X
X
X
13
Scrub motor solenoid L4 over
current
X
X
X
14
Glow plug relay K4 coil over current
15
Scrub cylinder lock solenoid L6 over
current
X
X
X
16
Right side scrub/sweep motor
solenoid L8 over current
17
Back-up alarm over current
18
Right side scrub lift cylinder solenoid
L9 over current
19
Horn over current
20
Left turn signal lamp over current
21
Right turn signal lamp over current
22
Head and tail lamp over current
23
Left stop lamp over current
24
Right stop lamp over current
Ext Scrub
System
X
Side Mist
System
X
Side Sweep
System
X
Side Scrub
System
Detergent
System
Solution pump(s) M4 and M6 over
current
Solution
System
00
Scrub
System
Fault Description
Recovery
System
Display
Code
Note: “X” indicates that the corresponding machine system is disabled (turned off).
X
X
X
X
57
Ext Scrub
System
X
X
X
X
Low oil pressure (diesel engine)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
38
Engine fault (critical)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
39
Hydraulic filter fault (plugged)
Detergent
System
X
Solution
System
X
Scrub
System
X
Fault Description
Recovery
System
X
Display
Code
Side Mist
System
Side Sweep
System
Control System
Side Scrub
System
Service Manual – SC8000
25
20A circuit breaker CB1 over current
26
20A circuit breaker CB2 over current
27
15A circuit breaker CB3 over current
28
20A circuit breaker CB4 over current
29
10A circuit breaker CB5 over current
30
Side sweep lift M7 actuator over
current
31
#1 detergent pump M10 over current
X
32
#2 detergent pump M11 over current
X
33
Engine hot fault (diesel)
34
Hydraulic oil temperature fault
35
Low voltage fault (battery)
36
Service engine fault (non critical)
37
X
58
Service Manual – SC8000
59
Electrical System
Functional Description
Overview
The electrical system consists of the fuse, relay and circuit breakers not covered in the Control System
section or the other manual sections.
Power Supplies
K1 POWER RELAY ON
K1 +
+ + +
+
+
+
+
CB6
+
+
VIO/GRA
+
+ + +
+ + + +
15A
+
+
+
F1
+ + +
12V DC
BATTERY
RED
+ +
KEY SWITCH
S1
BOUTPUT
PIN J2-1
DRIVER
BOX
BLU/GRN
- - -
K1
+
+
+ + +
ORN/GRN
IGN RUN (ON)
RELAY COIL
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RED/VIO
+ + + + + + + +
FUSE
100A
- - - - -
B+
SUPPLY
POWER RELAY
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
CB5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
BAT (-)
Circuit Description
• The 100-amp Fuse F1 must be closed to provide positive battery voltage to the entire electrical system.
• The circuit breaker CB6 must be closed to provide voltage to the Key Switch S1.
• The Ignition Key Switch S1 must be on to provide positive battery voltage to the K1 Relay Coil and certain
inputs on the Driver Box.
• The circuit breakers CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4 and CB5 must be closed to provide voltage to the side broom
actuator, lighting systems, electric pump motors and solenoid valves.
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Component Locations
K1 Power Relay
The K1 Power Relay is mounted inside
the control board assembly. Note that
a second identical power relay (K4) is
installed on diesel models as the glow plug
power relay.
K1 Power
Relay
Circuit Breakers
The Circuit Breakers are mounted on the control board to
the left of the Operator position.
Circuit
Breakers
60
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
100-amp Fuse F1
The 100-amp Fuse F1 is tied up with the engine harness connectors
and can be accessed by tipping out the recovery tank.
100-amp
Fuse F1
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
No power to the
machine
The 100-amp fuse F1 is
open.
Replace the fuse.
No machine
systems will operate
Main power relay K1 coil
over current (fault code 02
displayed)
• Check K1 relay coil wiring for problems (+ ORN/
GRN and - BLU/GRN).
No glow plug icon
displayed on LCD
(diesel engine only)
Glow plug relay K4 coil
over current (fault code 14
displayed)
• Check K4 relay coil wiring for problems (+ ORN/
GRN and - WHT/ORN).
Fault code 20
displayed
Left turn signal lamp over
current
• Check left turn signal wiring for problems (+ YEL
and - BLK).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 36 ohms,
replace. Also see main power distribution electrical
ladder detail. (Spec 0.29A @ 12V). Replace as
necessary.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 36 ohms,
replace. Also see diesel glow plug starting circuit
electrical ladder detail.
• Check lamp for short (see the I/O table for circuit
spec).
Fault code 21
displayed
Right turn signal lamp over
current
• Check right turn signal wiring for problems (+ GRN
and - BLK).
• Check lamp for short (see the I/O table for circuit
spec).
Fault code 22
displayed
Head and tail lamp over
current
• Check head and tail lamp wiring for problems
(+ BRN, YEL/RED, ORN/ BLU and - BLK).
• Check lamps for short (see the I/O table for circuit
spec).
61
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Problem
Cause
Correction
Fault code 23
displayed
Left stop lamp over current
• Check left stop lamp wiring for problems (+ ORN/
BRN and - BLK).
• Check lamps for short (see the I/O table for circuit
spec).
Fault code 24
displayed
Right stop lamp over current
Same as left stop lamp just different wire color
(+ YEL/RED and - BLK).
Fault code 25
displayed
20A Circuit breaker CB1
over current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB1
power for head/tail and turn signal lamps. Check for
GRA/RED wire shorted to ground.
Fault code 26
displayed
20A Circuit breaker CB2
over current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB2
power for mist pump (M5) and (M8) wash hose
pump. Check for BLU wire shorted to ground.
Fault code 27
displayed
15A Circuit breaker CB3
over current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB3
power for side broom actuator motor (M7). Check for
VIO wire shorted to ground.
Fault code 28
displayed
20A Circuit breaker CB4
over current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB4
power for hydraulic solenoid manifold coils (L4-L 11).
Check for ORN wire shorted to ground.
Fault code 29
displayed
10A Circuit breaker CB5
over current
Control board has sensed open circuit fault for CB5
power for hydraulic solenoid manifold coils (L1, L2
and L3), and also Pumps M4 and M6. Check for
GRN/BRN wire shorted to ground.
Fault code 35
displayed
Low voltage fault (battery)
• Check the alternator output.
• Test the battery.
• Clean and tighten the cables.
62
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Specifications
Component Specifications
Component
Specifications
Current – 0.29 Amps @ 12V
K1 and K4 Relays
Nominal Coil Resistance – 46 ± 5 ohms
Connector Callout – Relay PCB
Pin#
Color
Type
Voltage
Pin Description and Function
J7-1
VIO/GRA
Input
B+
Module relays load power supply
J7-2
BLU/PINK
Output
B+
Engine ECU starter relay command
J7-3
WHT/BRN
Input
0V Floats
J7-4
BLK
Input
B-
Module relays coil ground supply
J7-5
PINK
Output
B+
Engine ECU ignition run relay command
J7-6
VIO/BRN
Input
B+
Module starter relay Bat +coil signal
J7-7
YEL/WHT
Input
0V Floats
J7-8
ORN/GRN
Input
B+
Engine start inhibit signal *
Engine run inhibit signal **
Module ignition relay Bat+ coil signal
* Note: The normal condition for the start inhibit is in its non-inhibited state. A float voltage of
approximately 8V (when referenced to B-) is measured when the key is in the start position.
When inhibited, the signal is pulled to ground, will read 0V and will prevent the engine
from cranking. This prevents the starter relay from being energized.
** Note:The normal condition for the run inhibit is its non-inhibited state. A float voltage of
approximately 10V (when referenced to B-) is measured when the key is in the start/run
and run positions. When inhibited, the signal is pulled to ground, will read 0V and will
prevent the engine ECU from receiving its needed input switch command. This prevents
the ignition system from firing, and if the engine is running will cause it to shut down.
63
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Input/Output Table
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Ref,
To
Digital
Voltage
0V (for
Propane); B+
(for Diesel)
B-
Pin
ID
Desig.
J1-1
Input
J1-2
CANbus
CAN L
CAN Bus
(-)
0-5V
J1-3
CANbus
CAN H
CAN Bus
(+)
Digital
voltage
Pin Assignment
Engine Run
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Comments
Engine Control
Module output
Switch to ground, ground = run, float = not running
(for Propane); Switch to Vbat (for Propane)
J1-3
Differential serial
data
User interface panel serial communication
0-5V
J1-2
Differential serial
data
User interface panel serial communication
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Ground or open, closes when Operator in seat
Nominal voltage provided is subject to change if
additional resolution is required
J1-4
Not Used
J1-5
Seat Switch
J1-6
Not Used
J1-7
Fuel Level Sensor
(diesel)
Variable
resistance
0.40 - 1.66V
B-
Variable
resistance to
ground, 33 - 240
ohms
Fuel Level Sensor
(LP)
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Ground or open, closed when tank is empty
Input
J1-8
Ground
J1-9
Ground
J1-10
5V output
Throttle Position
(3.3V-A)
3.3V-A
+3.3V
B-
Pedal position
potentiometer
end 5K ohm
Drive Pedal sensor High side
J1-11
ground
output
Throttle Position
Ground
Ground
0V
B-
Pedal position
potentiometer
end 5K ohm
Drive Pedal sensor Low side
J1-12
Input
Ignition Input Voltage
Analog
voltage
B+
B-
System voltage
From key switch Ignition position
J1-13
Ground
J1-14
Ground
J1-15
Ground
64
Service Manual – SC8000
Pin
ID
Desig.
J1-16
Input
J1-17
J1-18
Pin Assignment
Horn Switch
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Ref,
To
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Ground
0V
B-
Ground
Comments
Pushbutton switch - ground or open - closed to
activate horn
Ground
Ground
Ground
Variable
resistance
0.16 - 2.24V
B-
Variable
resistance to
ground, 12-500
ohms
J1-19
Input
Hydraulic Fluid Temp
J1-20
Input
Brake Pedal Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Closes when brake pedal released
J1-21
Input
Solution Empty Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Ground or open, closes when tank is empty
J1-22
Output
Low side
driver
0V
B-
MOSFET gate on
relay PCB assy. - Ground or float
3 mA @12V
J1-23
Start Inhibit
Ground
J1-24
Input
Start KEYPOS Switch
Digital
voltage
B+
B-
System voltage
From key switch
J1-25
Input
Check Engine Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Engine Control
Module low side
output
Switch to ground,
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Level switch, ground or open, opens when tank is
full
J1-26
J1-27
Ground
Input
Recovery Full Switch
J1-28
Ground
J1-29
Ground
J1-30
Input
Engine Coolant Temp
Analog
voltage
0.34 - 2.93
B-
Engine Control
Module low side
output
J1-31
Input
Throttle Position
Sensor
Analog
voltage
0 - 5V
B-
Pedal position
potentiometer
wiper 5K ohm
Drive Pedal sensor wiper (0-5K ohm)
65
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Pin
ID
Desig.
Pin Assignment
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
J1-32
Input
Hydraulic Filter Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Ground or open, closed when filter plugged
J1-33
Input
Extend Scrub Level
Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
B-
Switch to ground
Ground or open, closed when tank is empty
J1-34
Output
Low side
driver
0V
B-
MOSFET gate on
relay PCB assy. - Ground or float
3 [email protected]
J1-35
Ignition Inhibit
Ref,
To
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Comments
Ground
J2-1
Output
Main Power Relay
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Relay coil - 0.29A
46 ± 5 ohms
@12V
J2-2
Output
Side Sweep/Scrub
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Hydraulic coil 1.5A @12V
8 ohms @ 20°C
J2-3
Output
Side Scrub Lift
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Hydraulic coil 1.5A @12V
8 ohms @ 20°C
J2-4
Output
Scrub Lock Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Hydraulic coil 1.5A @12V
8 ohms @ 20°C
J2-5
Output
Squeegee Down
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Hydraulic coil 1.5A @12V
8 ohms @ 20°C
J2-6
Output
Squeegee Up
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Hydraulic coil 1.5A @12V
8 ohms @ 20°C
J2-7
Output
Scrub Brush Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Hydraulic coil 1.5A @12V
8 ohms @ 20°C
J2-8
Vacuum Motor
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Hydraulic coil 1.5A @12V
8 ohms @ 20°C
J2-9
Extended Scrub Water
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Solution solenoid
- 1.5A @12V
17W
J2-10
Side Scrub Solution
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Solution solenoid
- 1.0A @12V
11W
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Electronic alarm
0.25A @12V
Power
12 - 15 VDC
B-
System voltage
J2-11
Output
Backup Audible Alarm
J2-12
Power
(B+)
Circuit Breaker 4
(VACC4)
Power from circuit breaker 4 (20A)
66
Service Manual – SC8000
Pin
ID
Desig.
J2-13
Output
Pin Assignment
Glow Plug Relay
J2-14
Ground
J2-15
Ground
J2-16
Ground
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Ref,
To
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Relay coil - 0.29A
46 ± 5 ohms
@12V
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Comments
J2-17
Ground
Ground
Ground
0V
B-
Ground
J2-18
Ground
Ground
Ground
0V
B-
Ground
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Solution solenoid
- 1.5A @12V
17W
Power
12 -1 5 VDC
B-
System voltage
Power from circuit breaker 5 (10A)
Low side
PWM
driver
PWM
0 - 12V
B-
Hydraulic coil 2.1A @12V
2.2 ohms @ 20°C
Low side
PWM
driver
PWM
0 - 12V
B-
Hydraulic coil 2.1A @12V
2.2 ohms @ 20°C
J2-19
Ground
J2-20
Ground
J2-21
Ground
J2-22
Output
Main Solution
Solenoid
J2-23
Power
(B+)
Circuit Breaker 5
(VACC5)
J2-24
Output
Scrub Pressure Up
J2-25
J2-26
Ground
Output
Scrub Pressure Down
J2-27
Ground
J2-28
Ground
J2-29
Output
ECM Engine 2200
RPM
High side
driver
12V
B-
Engine Control
Module input
12V for 2400 RPM, float otherwise
J2-30
Output
ECM Engine 2400
RPM
High side
driver
12V
B-
Engine Control
Module input
12V for 2200 RPM, float otherwise
J2-31
Output
Left Front Turn Lamp
High side
driver
12V
B-
Incandescent
lamp - 0.33A
@12V
0.4A @14.5V (4W turn lamp)
67
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Pin
ID
Desig.
Pin Assignment
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
J2-32
Output
Right Front Turn Lamp
High side
driver
12V
B-
Incandescent
lamp - 0.33A
@12V
0.4A @14.5V (4W turn lamp)
J2-33
Output
Left Rear Stop/Turn
High side
driver
12V
B-
Incandescent
lamp - 2.2A
@12V
2.7A @14.5V (26W stop & turn lamp)
J2-34
Output
Right Rear Stop/Turn
High side
driver
12V
B-
Incandescent
lamp - 2.2A
@12V
2.7A @14.5V (26W stop & turn lamp)
J2-35
Output
Extended Scrub Pump
Low side
PWM
driver
PWM
0 - 12V
B-
Pump motor 11.5
FLA @ 12V, 46
LRA
5KHz variable duty cycle
J3-1
Power
(B+)
Circuit Breaker 1
(VACC1)
Power
12 - 15 VDC
B-
System voltage
Power from circuit breaker 1 (20A)
J3-2
Output
Main Solution Pump
Low side
PWM
driver
PWM
0 - 12V
B-
Pump motor 11.5
FLA @ 12V, 46
LRA
5KHz variable duty cycle
J3-3
Ref,
To
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Comments
Ground
J3-4
Output
Side Sweep Actuator
- HI
(Red Lead)
H-bridge
driver
12V
B-
Actuator motor
20+/-2 FLA, 80
LRA (est.)
Bridge (switching power/ground)
(+) for Down, otherwise open
J3-5
Output
Side Sweep Actuator
- LO
(Black Lead)
H-bridge
driver
0V
B-
Actuator motor
20+/-2 FLA, 80
LRA (est.)
Bridge (switching power/ground)
(-) for Up, otherwise open
J3-6
Ground
J3-7
Output
Side Sweep Actuator
- MID
(White, Common
Lead)
H-bridge
driver
B+ or 0V
B-
Actuator motor
20+/-2 FLA, 80
LRA (est.)
Bridge (switching power/ground)
(+) for Up, (-) for Down
J3-8
Output
Head / Tail Lamps
High side
driver
12V
B-
Incandescent
lamp - 9.3 @12V
11.3A @14.5V (2x 50W headlamp, 2x 5.6W tail
lamp)
J3-9
Output
Circuit Breaker 1
(VACC1)
Power
12 - 15 VDC
B-
System voltage
Power from circuit breaker 1 (20A)
68
Service Manual – SC8000
Pin
ID
Desig.
J3-10
Pin Assignment
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Ref,
To
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Comments
Ground
J3-11
Ground
Ground
Ground
0V
B-
Ground
J3-12
Ground
Ground
Ground
0V
B-
Ground
J3-13
Ground
Ground
Ground
0V
B-
Ground
J3-14
Power
(B+)
Circuit Breaker2
(VACC2)
Power
12 - 15 VDC
B-
System voltage
Power from circuit breaker 2 (20A)
J3-15
Power
(B+)
Circuit Breaker 2
(VACC2)
Power
12 - 15 VDC
B-
System voltage
Power from circuit breaker 2 (20A)
J3-16
Power
(B+)
Circuit Breaker 3
(VACC3)
Power
12 - 15 VDC
B-
System voltage
Power from circuit breaker 3 (15A)
J3-17
Output
Horn
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Electromagnetic
horn 4A @12V
J3-18
Output
Side Sweep Mist
Pump
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Pump motor 3.9
FLA @ 24V, 16
LRA
24V pump operated at 12V
J3-19
Output
Detergent Pump 2 (-)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
B-
0.65A @ 12V
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10 Hz
J3-20
Output
Detergent Pump 2 (+)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
B-
0.65A @ 12V
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10 Hz
J3-21
Output
Detergent Pump 1 (-)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
B-
0.65A @ 12V
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10 Hz
J3-22
Output
Detergent Pump 1 (+)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
B-
0.65A @ 12V
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10 Hz
J3-23
Output
Wand Solution Pump
Low side
driver
0V
B-
Pump motor 12.5
[email protected], 50
LRA
69
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Shop Measurements - Driver Box
Shop measurement values can help you recognize “normal” values. The values in this table were measured on one propane engine model with the
black voltmeter lead connected to battery negative and everything connected. The model had a right side scrub option with no side sweep.
Pin
ID
Wire
Color
Pin Assignment
Digital
Voltage
0V (for
Propane);
B+ (for
Diesel)
Comments
Differential serial
data
2.49v key on
User interface panel serial communication
0-5V
Differential serial
data
2.50v key on
User interface panel serial communication
0V
Switch to ground
12.8v off seat
Ground or open, closes when Operator in
seat
J1-2
BLK/YEL
CAN L
CAN Bus
(-)
0-5V
J1-3
ORN/BLK CAN H
CAN Bus
(+)
Digital
voltage
Engine Control
Module output
11.5v key on
Not Used
YEL
J1-6
J1-7
“Real World”
Shop
Measurements
0.01v running
GRA
J1-5
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Switch to ground, ground = run, float = not
running (for Propane); Switch to Vbat (for
Propane)
J1-1
J1-4
Engine Run
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Seat Switch
0.008v on seat
Not Used
BRN/
WHT
Variable resistance
Fuel Level Sensor Variable
0.40 - 1.66V to ground, 33 - 240
(diesel)
resistance
ohms
Fuel Level Sensor
(LP)
J1-8
Not Used
J1-9
Not Used
Digital
voltage
0V
Switch to ground
Nominal voltage provided is subject to
change if additional resolution is required
3.3v not empty
Ground or open, closed when tank is
empty
J1-10
BRN/
WHT
Throttle Position
Supply
(3.3V-A)
3.3V-A
+3.3V
Pedal position
potentiometer end
5K ohm
3.24v key on
Drive Pedal sensor High side
J1-11
YEL/GRA
Throttle Position
Ground
Ground
0V
Pedal position
potentiometer end
5K ohm
0.014v key on
Drive Pedal sensor Low side
J1-12
ORN/
GRN
Ignition Input
Voltage
Analog
voltage
B+
System voltage
12.25v key on
From key switch Ignition position
70
Service Manual – SC8000
Pin
ID
Wire
Color
Pin Assignment
J1-13
Not Used
J1-14
Not Used
J1-15
Not Used
J1-16
RED/BLK Horn Switch
J1-17
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Digital
voltage
0V
Switch to ground
Ground
0V
Ground
Load or Supply
Characteristics
12v open
0.002v closed
Comments
This circuit is for an optional foot operated
switch for sounding the horn.
Not Used
J1-18
BLK
J1-19
GRN/
ORN
J1-20
BIO/WHT
Brake Pedal
Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
Switch to ground
J1-21
VIO/YEL
Solution Empty
Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
Switch to ground
J1-22
WHT/
BRN
Low side
driver
0V
MOSFET gate on
relay PCB assy. - 3
mA @12V
J1-23
Ground
Hydraulic Fluid
Temp
Start Inhibit
Variable resistance
Variable
0.16 - 2.24V to ground, 12-500
resistance
ohms
0.001v cranking
2.406v at 76 Deg
F. (24.4 Deg C.)
0.04v at rest
11.9v pressed
0.004v empty
12.26v not empty
9.2v cranking
normal
Closes when brake pedal released
Ground or open, closes when tank is
empty
Ground or float
0.015v inhibited
Ground
J1-24
VIO/BRN
Start KEYPOS
Switch
Digital
voltage
B+
System voltage
J1-25
GRN/YEL
Check Engine
Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
Engine Control
Module low side
output
Digital
voltage
0V
Switch to ground
J1-26
J1-27
“Real World”
Shop
Measurements
11v cranking
From key switch
4.5v Eng. running Switch to ground,
Ground
GRA/YEL
Recovery Full
Switch
J1-28
Not Used
J1-29
Not Used
0.004v empty
12.13v full
Level switch, ground or open, opens when
tank is full
71
Service Manual – SC8000
Pin
ID
Wire
Color
J1-30
VIO/BLU
Pin Assignment
Engine Coolant
Temp
Drive Pedal
J1-31 ORN/GRA
Sensor
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Analog
voltage
0.34 - 2.93
Analog
voltage
0 - 5V
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Engine Control
Module low side
output
Pedal position
potentiometer wiper
5K ohm
“Real World”
Shop
Measurements
Comments
1.59v at 132 Deg.
F (56 Deg. C)
0.919v Full FWD
0.449v Neutral
Drive Pedal sensor wiper (0-5K ohm)
0.222v Full REV
J1-32
RED/YEL
Hydraulic Filter
Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
Switch to ground
11.7v key on
Ground or open, closed when filter
plugged
J1-33
BRN/BLU
Extend Scrub
Level Switch
Digital
voltage
0V
Switch to ground
11.7v key on
Ground or open, closed when tank is
empty
J1-34
YEL/WHT Ignition Inhibit
Low side
driver
0V
MOSFET gate on
relay PCB assy. - 3
[email protected]
11.7v key on
Ground or float
0.33v key on
46 ± 5 ohms
J1-35
Not Used
J2-1
BLU/GRN Main Power Relay
Low side
driver
0V
Relay coil - 0.29A
@12V
J2-2
BLK/WHT
Side Sweep/Scrub
Solenoid (S8)
Low side
driver
0V
Hydraulic coil - 1.5A
@12V
J2-3
GRN/VIO
Side Scrub Lift
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Hydraulic coil - 1.5A
@12V
J2-4
YEL/BLU
Scrub Lock
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Hydraulic coil - 1.5A
@12V
J2-5
RED/GRA
Squeegee Down
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Hydraulic coil - 1.5A
@12V
J2-6
BRN/GRN
Squeegee Up
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Hydraulic coil - 1.5A
@12V
11.9v Sol off
0.39v Sol. on
11.9v Sol off
0.23v Sol on
11.9v Sol. off
0.22v Sol. on
11.9v Sol. off
0.188v Sol. On
14.6v Sol. off
0.213v Sol. on
8 ohms @ 20°C
8 ohms @ 20°C
8 ohms @ 20°C
8 ohms @ 20°C
8 ohms @ 20°C
72
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Load or Supply
Characteristics
Pin
ID
Wire
Color
J2-7
ORN/BLU
Scrub Brush
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Hydraulic coil - 1.5A
@12V
J2-8
BRN/YEL
Vacuum Motor
Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Hydraulic coil - 1.5A
@12V
Extended Scrub
Water Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Solution solenoid 1.5A @12V
J2-9
Pin Assignment
J2-10
BLU/YEL
Side Scrub
Solution Solenoid
Low side
driver
0V
Solution solenoid 1.0A @12V
J2-11
BLU/BLK
Backup Audible
Alarm
Low side
driver
0V
Electronic alarm
0.25A @12V
J2-12
ORN
Circuit Breaker 4
(VACC4)
Power
J2-13
WHT/
ORN
Glow Plug Relay
Low side
driver
0V
Relay coil - 0.29A
@12V
J2-14
Not Used
J2-15
Not Used
J2-16
12 - 15 VDC System voltage
“Real World”
Shop
Measurements
14.6v Sol. off
0.25v Sol. on
14.1v Sol. off
0.2v Sol. on
8 ohms @ 20°C
8 ohms @ 20°C
Not measured
14.4v Sol. off
0.202v Sol. on
This was pulsed on momentarily. You may
not see the change without a Min/Max
function on your voltmeter.
14.4v off
14.5v Eng.
running
Not measured
Power from circuit breaker 4 (20A)
46 ± 5 ohms
Not Used
J2-17
BLK
Ground
Ground
0V
Ground
-0.025v running
J2-18
BLK
Ground
Ground
0V
Ground
-0.025v running
Low side
driver
0V
Solution solenoid 1.5A @12V
J2-19
Not Used
J2-20
Not Used
J2-21
Not Used
J2-22
Comments
YEL/GRN
J2-23 GRN/BRN
Main Solution
Solenoid
Circuit Breaker 5
(VACC5)
Power
12 -1 5 VDC System voltage
12.9v Sol. Off
0.289v Sol. on
14.52v Eng.
running
This was held on steady.
Power from circuit breaker 5 (10A)
73
Service Manual – SC8000
Pin
ID
Wire
Color
Pin Assignment
J2-24 ORN/RED
Scrub Pressure
Up
J2-25
Not Used
J2-26
WHT/VIO
Scrub Pressure
Down
J2-27
Not Used
J2-28
Not Used
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Load or Supply
Characteristics
“Real World”
Shop
Measurements
Low side
PWM
driver
PWM
0 - 12V
Hydraulic coil - 2.1A
@12V
9.6v all 3 scrub
pressure settings
Low side
PWM
driver
Comments
Voltage moves slightly when changing
pressure setting.
9.9v @ 1
PWM
0 - 12V
Hydraulic coil - 2.1A
@12V
9.4v @ 2
2.2 ohms @ 20°C
9.0v @ 3
2.79v at idle
J2-29
GRA/
ORN
ECM Engine 2200
RPM
High side
driver
12V
Engine Control
Module input
14.3v Mid
12V for 2400 RPM, float otherwise
2.81v High
2.79v at idle
J2-30
ECM Engine 2400
GRA/BLU
RPM
High side
driver
12V
Engine Control
Module input
2.79v Mid
12V for 2200 RPM, float otherwise
14.3v high
J2-31
YEL
Left Front Turn
Lamp
High side
driver
12V
Incandescent lamp 0.33A @12V
0.004v off
J2-32
GRN
Right Front Turn
Lamp
High side
driver
12V
Incandescent lamp 0.33A @12V
0.004v off
J2-33 ORN/BRN
Left Rear Stop/
Turn
High side
driver
12V
Incandescent lamp 2.2A @12V
0.004v off
J2-34
Right Rear Stop/
Turn
High side
driver
12V
Incandescent lamp 2.2A @12V
0.004v off
YEL/RED
12.3v on
12.3v on
12.3v on
12.3v on
0.4A @14.5V (4W turn lamp)
0.4A @14.5V (4W turn lamp)
2.7A @14.5V (26W stop & turn lamp)
2.7A @14.5V (26W stop & turn lamp)
74
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Load or Supply
Characteristics
“Real World”
Shop
Measurements
PWM
0 - 12V
Pump motor 11.5
FLA @ 12V, 46 LRA
Not Measured
Pin
ID
Wire
Color
J2-35
GRA/
ORN
Extended Scrub
Pump
Low side
PWM
driver
J3-1
GRA/RED
Circuit Breaker 1
(VACC1)
Power
J3-2
GRN/BLU
Main Solution
Pump
J3-3
J3-4
J3-5
Pin Assignment
12 - 15 VDC System voltage
5KHz variable duty cycle
Power from circuit breaker 1 (20A)
Low side
PWM
driver
PWM
0 - 12V
Pump motor 11.5
FLA @ 12V, 46 LRA
H-bridge
driver
12V
Actuator motor
20+/-2 FLA, 80 LRA
(est.)
Not Measured
Bridge (switching power/ground)
(+) for Down, otherwise open
H-bridge
driver
0V
Actuator motor
20+/-2 FLA, 80 LRA
(est.)
Not Measured
Bridge (switching power/ground)
(-) for Up, otherwise open
Not Measured
Bridge (switching power/ground)
(+) for Up, (-) for Down
5KHz variable duty cycle
Not Used
Side Sweep
BLU/BRN Actuator - HI
(Red Lead)
WHT/
RED
Side Sweep
Actuator - LO
(Black Lead)
J3-6
Not Used
J3-7
GRA/VIO
Side Sweep
Actuator - MID
(White, Common
Lead)
H-bridge
driver
B+ or 0V
Actuator motor
20+/-2 FLA, 80 LRA
(est.)
J3-8
BRN
Head / Tail Lamps
High side
driver
12V
Incandescent lamp 9.3 @12V
J3-9
12.4v key on
Comments
Circuit Breaker 1
GRA/RED
(VACC1)
J3-10
Power
12 - 15 VDC System voltage
0.004v off
11.9v on
12.4v key on
Not Used
J3-11
BLK
Ground
Ground
0V
Ground
-0.06v Eng.
running
J3-12
BLK
Ground
Ground
0V
Ground
-0.03v Eng.
running
J3-13
BLK
Ground
Ground
0V
Ground
-0.19v Eng
running
11.3A @14.5V (2x 50W headlamp, 2x
5.6W tail lamp)
Power from circuit breaker 1 (20A)
75
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Signal
Nominal
Voltage at
Connector
(when
activated)
Circuit Breaker2
(VACC2)
Power
12 - 15 VDC System voltage
12.7.v key on
Power from circuit breaker 2 (20A)
BLU
Circuit Breaker 2
(VACC2)
Power
12 - 15 VDC System voltage
12.7v key on
Power from circuit breaker 2 (20A)
VI
Circuit Breaker 3
(VACC3)
Power
12 - 15 VDC System voltage
12.7v key on
Power from circuit breaker 3 (15A)
Pin
ID
Wire
Color
J3-14
BLU
J3-15
J3-16
Pin Assignment
Load or Supply
Characteristics
“Real World”
Shop
Measurements
Comments
12.6v off
Low side
driver
0V
Electromagnetic
horn 4A @12V
Side Sweep Mist
Pump
Low side
driver
0V
Pump motor 3.9
FLA @ 24V, 16 LRA
Not Measured
24V pump operated at 12V
BLK/RED
Detergent Pump
2 (-)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
0.65A @ 12V
0.16v to 14.5v
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10 Hz
Normal scrub approx 0.2v. Burst of power
scrub approx 10-14v
J3-20
BLK/YEL
Detergent Pump
2 (+)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
0.65A @ 12V
0.16v to 14.5v
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10
Hz. Burst of power scrub approx 10-14v
J3-21
RED/BLU
Detergent Pump
1 (-)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
0.65A @ 12V
0.16v to 14.5v
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10
Hz. Burst of power scrub approx 10-14v
J3-22
RED/
WHT
Detergent Pump
1 (+)
H-bridge
driver
0 to B+
0.65A @ 12V
0.16v to 14.5v
Pulsed on and off at a rate less than 10
Hz. Burst of power scrub approx 10-14v
J3-23
BLU/RED
Wand Solution
Pump
Low side
driver
0V
Pump motor 12.5
[email protected], 50 LRA
Not Measured
J3-17
WHT/YEL Horn
J3-18
YEL/BLK
J3-19
2.7v on
76
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Shop Measurements - Relay PCB
Shop measurement values can help you recognize “normal” values. The values in the table were measured
on one propane engine model with the black voltmeter lead connected to battery negative and everything
connected. The model had a right side scrub option with no side sweep.
Pin
ID
Wire Color
J7-1
VIO/GRA
B+
12.3v key on
J7-2
BLU/PINK
Engine Start
0.03v key on, 10.7v cranking
J7-3
WHT/BRN
Start Inhibit
0.2v key on, 8.8v cranking
J7-4
BLK
Ground
0.005 key on, 0.2v cranking
J7-5
PINK
Engine Run
12.3v key on, 11.2v cranking, 14.6v running
Pin Assignment
“Real World” Shop Measurements
J7-6
VIO/BRN
Start Key Pos
0.2v key on, 11.2v cranking
J7-7
YEL/WHT
Ignition Inhibit
9.5v cranking, 9.9v key on, 10.6v running
J7-8
ORN/GRN
Ignition Key Pos
12.3v key on, 11v cranking, 14.6v running
77
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
78
Wiring Diagram - 56108185 Rev. A Sheet 1 Kubota LPG Engine
CONFIDENTIAL
1
RED/VIO
87
RED/VIO
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20A.
CB5
2
GRN/BRN
1
30
RED
RED
RELAY, POWER
RED/VIO
1
2
2
RED
1
RED/VIO
J3-1
J3-9
(VACC1)
J3-16
(VACC3)
BLU
BLU
J3-14
J3-15
(VACC2)
GRN/BRN
J2-23
(VACC5)
ORN
J2-12
(VACC4)
VIO
M
+
C
BRN/WHT
RUN SIGNAL (GROUND)
J1-30
VIO/BLU
X2
F
F
VIO/BLU
GRN/YEL
X1
G
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT
J1-25
G
GRN/YEL
MIL OUTPUT
(SWITCHED GROUND)
J2-29
GRA/ORN
J
GRA/ORN
THROTTLE INPUT
(12V FOR 2200 RPM)
GRA/BLU
THROTTLE INPUT
(12V FOR 2400 RPM)
-
YEL/BLK
PUMP, WAND
BLU/RED
J2-13
-
GRN/BLU
GRA/ORN
WHT/ORN
F
BLU/PINK
START COMAND
PINK
X4
A
A
PINK
IGN. SW INPUT
PINK
X1
B
B
FUEL PUMP (+)
PINK/YEL A
FUEL PUMP (-)
BLK/RED A
X78
BLK/GRN A
GRN/WHT B
GRN/RED C
WHT/GRN D
ALT. EXCITE
B1
GROUND
ORN/GRN
RELAY, GLOWPLUGS
ORN/GRN
IGNITION_KEYPOS
J1-24
VIO/BRN
J1-34
-
K
X1
BLU/PINK F
S1
SWITCH, IGN.
ORN/GRN
J1-12
J3-2
M6
M
APPD
HH
K4
J1-22
+
DFTM
PMO
RELAY, POWER
(OPTIONAL)
M
K1
BLU/GRN
J3-23
PUMP, SOLUTION
GRN/BRN
3
J3-18
M4
+
GRN/BRN
GRA/BLU
VIO/GRA
(OPTIONAL)
-
X2
J
X2
K
B
J2-1
M
REVISIONS
DATE
3-4-13
RELEASE
ENGINE SYSTEM
J2-30
M8
2
ECO
A-09116
REFERENCE:
56107659 - DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA LP
STARTER B+
X7
C
VIO/BRN
PUMP, MIST
1
BLU
REV
GRA
M5
+
1 OF 2
A
RED
J1-1
RED/VIO
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 A.
(LIGHTS)
GRA/RED
GRA/RED
BLU
56108185
BLK
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15 A.
CB6
RED/VIO
1
-
SHEET
12 VDC
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15 A.
(ACTUATOR)
CB1
2
+
RED
2
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 A.
CB3
VIO
F1
FUSE, 100 A.
VIO/GRA
2
DWG. NO.
BT
1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 10A.
CB2
BLU
1
RED
2
ORN
THIS DRAWING AND THE DESIGN REPRESENTED HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.,
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA AND IT HAS BEEN ISSUED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE REPRODUCED NOR COPIED NOR USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS ISSUED AND RECIPIENT
AGREES TO RETURN IT UPON REQUEST.
K1
CB4
ORN/GRN
START_KEYPOS
J7-6
J7-8
START_INHIBIT
WHT/BRN
J7-3
K2
J7-1
RUN RELAY
J7-7
K3
J7-2
START RELAY
IGNITION INHIBIT
YEL/WHT
J2-35
PUMP, EXT. SCRUB (OPTIONAL)
DRIVER BOX
B+
VIO/GRA
ENGINE START
BLU/PINK
J7-5
ENGINE RUN
PINK
J7-4
GROUND
BLK
RELAY PCB
H3
IGNITION_KEYPOS
ORN/GRN
LP7
PINK
1
2
BLK
BEACON
L1
GRN/BRN
1
2
BRN/YEL
J2-8
J2-11
BLU/BLK
1
2
L2
GRN/BRN
1
ORN/GRN
(OPTIONAL)
BACK UP ALARM
H4
VAC FAN S1
2
RED/GRA
ORN/GRN
J2-5
J3-17
SQUEEGEE DOWN S2
WHT/YEL
1
2
1
2
BRN/GRN
J6-1 (B+)
J6-2 (B-)
BLK
DASHBOARD PANEL
ORN/BLK
BLK/YEL
J1-3 (CAN+)
J1-2 (CAN-)
L3
GRN/BRN
ORN/GRN
ORN/GRN
HORN
J6-3 (CAN+)
J6-4 (CAN-)
J2-6
TWISTED PAIR
SQUEEGEE UP S3
TWISTED PAIR
L10
ORN
1
2
YEL/GRN
J2-22
BLU/YEL
J2-10
VALVE, MAIN SOLUTION
1
LP1
1
BRN
L11
ORN
2
LP2
L4
1
2
ORN/BLU
J2-7
SCUB BRUSH S4
J3-8
J2-34
J2-33
J2-32
J2-31
BRN
YEL/RED
ORN/BRN
GRN
YEL
1
2
ORN/RED
J2-24
J3-5
J3-4
L5
1
2
WHT/VIO
J2-26
SCRUB PRESSURE PROPORTIONAL DOWN (S5)
L6
ORN
1
2
YEL/BLU
J2-4
BLK
WHT/RED
GRA/VIO
J1-10
BRN/WHT
J1-31
ORN/GRA
J1-11
YEL/GRA
M
R1
1
M7 ACTUATOR MOTOR
WIRING:
(-) WHITE & (+) RED = CW
(EXTEND)
(+) WHITE & (-) BLACK =
CCW( RETRACT)
WHITE = COMMON
WHT
RED
GRN/VIO
J2-3
1
BLK/WHT
LAMP, LEFT REAR S/T/T
LP5
2
BLK
2
BLK
LAMP,LEFT FRONT TURN
1
GRA/BLK
J1-7
(CLOSES WHEN TANK
IS EMPTY)
2
BLK
DRIVE PEDAL SENSOR, 5K OHM
L8
1
WHT
LAMP, RIGHT REAR S/T/T
LP4
WHT
BLK
LP6
3
R3
2
BLK
LP3
LAMP, RIGHT FRONT TURN
2
2
SIDE SCRUB LIFT (S9)
ORN
1
GRN
L9
1
BLK
RED
BRN
ORN/BRN
YEL
SCRUB CYLINDER LOCK (S6)
ORN
BLK
RED
BRN
YEL/RED
ACTUATOR, SIDE BROOM
BLU/BRN
J3-7
2
HEAD LIGHT, LEFT
M7
SCRUB PRESSURE PROPORTIONAL UP (S7)
ORN
1
BRN
L7
ORN
BLK
HEAD LIGHT, RIGHT
VALVE, RIGHT SOLUTION
ORN
2
J2-2
BLK
SENDER, FUEL
S5
1
NOTE: R3 IS USED ON DIESEL ONLY
2
SWITCH, LOW LP PRESSURE
SIDE SWEEP/SCRUB (S8)
NOTE: S5 IS USED ON LPG ONLY
R2
1
GRN/ORN
J1-19
2
SENDER, HYDRAULIC OIL TEMP
M10
+
M
-
RED/BLU
GRA/YEL
J1-27
-
BLK/RED
(CLOSES WHEN
TANK IS EMPTY)
VIO/YEL
S3
2
(CLOSES WHEN FILTER IS
PLUGGED)
1
RED/YEL
J1-32
1
S4
J3-20
BLK
2
J3-19
SWITCH, HYDRAULIC FILTER
PUMP, CHEMICAL 2
BLK/YEL
BLK
SWITCH, SOLUTION EMPTY
J3-22
M11
M
1
SWITCH, RECOVERY FULL
J1-21
+
S2
2
J3-21
PUMP, CHEMICAL 1
RED/WHT
(OPENS WHEN
TANK IS FULL)
(CLOSES WHEN BRAKE
PEDAL RELEASED)
VIO/WHT
J1-20
1
S6
2
BLK
SWITCH, BRAKE
J1-33
(CLOSES WHEN
TANK IS EMPTY)
BRN/BLU
WHT
S7
BLK
BLK
SWITCH, EXTENDED SCRUB
S29
J1-16
CHEMICAL PUMP REAR VIEW
1
RED/BLK
J1-18
J2-17
J2-18
BLK
BLK
BLK
J3-12
J3-13
J1-5
BLK
BLK
YEL
2
BLK
SWITCH, PUSH BUTTON, HORN
BLK
S30
2
1
SWITCH, SEAT
SC8000 W/KUBOTA LP ENGINE SYSTEM
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS APPLY AFTER
PLATING AND HEAT TREATING,
BUT BEFORE PAINTING.
4. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
EDGES.
DIM. IN [ ] ARE MM.
UNITS IN [ ] ARE ISO METRIC
AS NOTED.
FORMS.DSN - E SIZE FORM 1/12/98
DRAWN
3-4-13
PMO
3-4-13
HH
NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.
CHECKED
PROJ ENG
APPROVED
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA 55447-3408
TITLE
APPROVED
APPROVED
SIZE
ORCAD
SC8000
FIRST USED ON
E
SCALE
CODE
DIAGRAM-LADDER
56108185
ASSY.
56381E16
SHEET
DWG. NO.
REV.
A
1 OF 2
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
79
Wiring Diagram - 56108185 Rev. A Sheet 2 Kubota Diesel Engine
CONFIDENTIAL
DWG. NO.
RED/VIO
87
RED/VIO
2
GRN/BRN
1
30
RED
RELAY, POWER
RED/VIO
1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15 A.
CB8
RED/VIO
1
RED/VIO
1
J1-30
J2-29
RED/VIO
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 A.
(LIGHTS)
GRA/RED
GRA/RED
J3-1
J3-9
(VACC1)
J3-16
(VACC3)
J3-14
J3-15
(VACC2)
J2-23
(VACC5)
ORN
J2-12
(VACC4)
-
YEL/BLK
1
87
1
E1
GRN/RED
GRN/YEL
X12
G
VIO/BLU
X19
F
GRA/ORN
X11
J
X142
J
X13
C
X140
C
X20
K
X141
K
X16
F
X114
F
BLU/PINK
X15
B
X117
B
S15
to
X113
G GRN/YEL
1
E2
BLU/PINK
PINK
B
3
S11
SWITCH, IGN.
J3-18
1
2
+
M
-
PUMP, WAND
BLU/RED
J1-12
M
-
GRN/BLU
BLK
+
STARTER
ENGINE RUN SIGNAL
VIO
RED
PINK
G2
B
RED
PINK
ALTERNATOR
S
S
F
I/F
L
X17
A
PINK
X118
A
J1-24
J1-22
M13
+
GRN/BRN
J1-34
M
-
GRA/ORN
WHT/ORN
APECS 3000 GOVERNOR
RED
J7-6
J7-3
K6
IGNITION INHIBIT
J7-7
K7
J7-1
RUN RELAY
J7-2
START RELAY
D3
(SHOWN IN LOW
PRESSURE STATE)
IGNITION_KEYPOS
ORN/GRN
VIO
SPEED SELECT 1
(2400 RPM)
SPEED SELECT 2
(2200 RPM)
GRA/BRN
ENGINE START
BLU/PINK
X119
D
X18
D
MAGNETIC PICKUP (+)
MAGNETIC PICKUP (-)
SERVICE TOOL (Tx)
SERVICE TOOL (Rx)
BLK
BLK
WHT
WHT/BLK
BLU
GRN
YEL
ORN
GRA
DIODE
B+
VIO/GRA
GRA
M17
PINK/YEL
+
M
-
BLK/RED
X14
C
X115
C
BLK
FUEL PUMP
LP12
ENGINE RUN
PINK
PINK
1
2
BLK
BEACON
GROUND
RELAY PCB
H5
D2
SWITCH, OIL PRESSURE
J7-5
DRIVER BOX
GRA
NO GRA/BRN
NC RED/YEL
DIODE
J7-8
J2-35
PUMP, EXT. SCRUB (OPTIONAL)
VIO
S28
C
ORN/GRN
START_INHIBIT
YEL/WHT
B (-)
ACTUATOR (+)
B (+)
ACTUATOR (-)
START_KEYPOS
WHT/BRN
A5
P
ORN/GRN
VIO/BRN
BLK
P
B1
ORN/GRN
RELAY, GLOWPLUGS
ORN/GRN
IGNITION_KEYPOS
J3-2
PUMP, SOLUTION
E4
M3
GRA
K9
J2-13
APPD
2
2
GRA/BRN
RELAY, POWER
M18
+
GRN/BRN
K10
BLU/GRN
J3-23
(OPTIONAL)
DFTM
SEE SHEET 1
BLK
BLU/PINK
RED
J2-1
M14
BLU
E3
REVISIONS
DATE
SWITCH, COOLANT TEMP.
L
(OPTIONAL)
1
2
2
GLOW
PLUGS
RED
PUMP, MIST
1
ECO
A
BLK
VIO/BRN
M
30
VIO/GRA
M5
2 OF 2
REV
RED
GRA/BLU
J2-30
GRN/BRN
BLU
BLU
+
56108185
BLK
12 VDC
GRA
J1-1
VIO
BLU
BT1
-
2
J1-25
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15 A.
(ACTUATOR)
CB9
2
+
RED
RED
2
RED
RELAY, GLOW PLUG
K11
2
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 A.
CB10
VIO
2
VIO/GRA
2
F2
FUSE, 100 A.
1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 10A.
CB12
BLU
1
RED
SHEET
30
50
1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20A.
CB7
RED
2
ORN
THIS DRAWING AND THE DESIGN REPRESENTED HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.,
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA AND IT HAS BEEN ISSUED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE REPRODUCED NOR COPIED NOR USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS ISSUED AND RECIPIENT
AGREES TO RETURN IT UPON REQUEST.
K8
CB11
BLK
J7-4
L12
GRN/BRN
1
2
BRN/YEL
J2-8
J2-11
BLU/BLK
1
2
(OPTIONAL)
BACK UP ALARM
H6
VAC FAN S1
L20
GRN/BRN
1
ORN/GRN
2
RED/GRA
ORN/GRN
J2-5
SQUEEGEE DOWN S2
J3-17
WHT/YEL
1
2
HORN
1
2
BRN/GRN
J6-1 (B+)
BLK
J6-2 (B-)
DASHBOARD PANEL
ORN/BLK
BLK/YEL
J1-3 (CAN+)
J1-2 (CAN-)
L21
GRN/BRN
ORN/GRN
ORN/GRN
J6-3 (CAN+)
J6-4 (CAN-)
J2-6
TWISTED PAIR
SQUEEGEE UP S3
TWISTED PAIR
L15
1
ORN
2
YEL/GRN
J2-22
BLU/YEL
J2-10
VALVE, MAIN SOLUTION
1
ORN
LP11
1
BRN
L18
2
2
ORN/BLU
J2-7
SCUB BRUSH S4
J3-8
J2-34
J2-33
J2-32
J2-31
BRN
YEL/RED
ORN/BRN
GRN
YEL
ORN/RED
J2-24
J3-5
J3-4
L16
1
2
WHT/VIO
J2-26
SCRUB PRESSURE PROPORTIONAL DOWN (S5)
L17
1
ORN
2
YEL/BLU
J2-4
BLK
WHT/RED
M
ACTUATOR, SIDE BROOM
BLU/BRN
J3-7
GRA/VIO
J1-10
BRN/WHT
J1-31
ORN/GRA
J1-11
YEL/GRA
R4
1
M7 ACTUATOR MOTOR
WIRING:
(-) WHITE & (+) RED = CW
(EXTEND)
(+) WHITE & (-) BLACK =
CCW( RETRACT)
WHITE = COMMON
WHT
RED
1
GRN/VIO
J2-3
1
BLK/WHT
LAMP, LEFT REAR S/T/T
LP14
2
BLK
2
BLK
LAMP,LEFT FRONT TURN
1
GRA/BLK
J1-7
(CLOSES WHEN TANK
IS EMPTY)
2
BLK
DRIVE PEDAL SENSOR, 5K OHM
L19
1
WHT
LAMP, RIGHT REAR S/T/T
LP10
WHT
BLK
LP8
3
R6
2
BLK
LP9
LAMP, RIGHT FRONT TURN
2
2
SIDE SCRUB LIFT (S9)
ORN
1
GRN
L13
ORN
BLK
RED
BRN
ORN/BRN
YEL
SCRUB CYLINDER LOCK (S6)
2
HEAD LIGHT, LEFT
BLK
RED
BRN
YEL/RED
M12
2
SCRUB PRESSURE PROPORTIONAL UP (S7)
ORN
1
BRN
L14
1
ORN
BLK
LP13
L22
1
ORN
2
HEAD LIGHT, RIGHT
VALVE, RIGHT SOLUTION
1
J2-2
BLK
SENDER, FUEL
S12
NOTE: R3 IS USED ON DIESEL ONLY
2
SWITCH, LOW LP PRESSURE
SIDE SWEEP/SCRUB (S8)
NOTE: S5 IS USED ON LPG ONLY
R5
1
GRN/ORN
J1-19
2
SENDER, HYDRAULIC OIL TEMP
M15
+
M
-
RED/BLU
GRA/YEL
J1-27
-
BLK/RED
(CLOSES WHEN
TANK IS EMPTY)
VIO/YEL
J1-21
M
S10
2
(CLOSES WHEN FILTER IS
PLUGGED)
1
RED/YEL
J1-32
1
S8
BLK
2
J3-19
J3-20
BLK
SWITCH, SOLUTION EMPTY
J3-22
SWITCH, HYDRAULIC FILTER
(CLOSES WHEN BRAKE
PEDAL RELEASED)
PUMP, CHEMICAL 2
BLK/YEL
1
SWITCH, RECOVERY FULL
M16
+
S14
2
J3-21
PUMP, CHEMICAL 1
RED/WHT
(OPENS WHEN
TANK IS FULL)
VIO/WHT
J1-20
1
S13
2
BLK
SWITCH, BRAKE
J1-33
(CLOSES WHEN
TANK IS EMPTY)
BRN/BLU
WHT
S9
BLK
BLK
SWITCH, EXTENDED SCRUB
S31
J1-16
CHEMICAL PUMP REAR VIEW
J1-18
J2-17
J2-18
J3-11
J3-12
J3-13
J1-5
1
RED/BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
YEL
2
BLK
SWITCH, PUSH BUTTON, HORN
BLK
S32
2
1
SWITCH, SEAT
SC8000 W/KUBOTA DIESEL ENGINE SYSTEM
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS APPLY AFTER
PLATING AND HEAT TREATING,
BUT BEFORE PAINTING.
4. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
EDGES.
DIM. IN [ ] ARE MM.
UNITS IN [ ] ARE ISO METRIC
AS NOTED.
FORMS.DSN - E SIZE FORM 1/12/98
DRAWN
3-4-13
PMO
3-4-13
HH
NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.
CHECKED
PROJ ENG
APPROVED
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA 55447-3408
TITLE
APPROVED
APPROVED
SIZE
ORCAD
SC8000
FIRST USED ON
E
SCALE
CODE
DIAGRAM-LADDER
56108185
ASSY.
56381E16
SHEET
DWG. NO.
REV.
A
2 OF 2
Service Manual – SC8000
Wiring Diagram Kubota 1.6L LPG Engine 56107659 REV. A
Electrical System
80
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
C
B
B
BLU/BRN 16-2
A
A
GRA/VIO 16-2
WHT/RED 16-2
RED/WHT 18-1
RED
X20
C
ACTUATOR, SIDE BROOM
L8
X15
2
1
2
BLK/WHT 18-2
1
ORN 18-17
S7
BLK
F
BLK
ORN 18-6
X43
A
A
YEL/GRN 18-1
B
B
WHT
30
SWITCH, EXT. SCRUB
(OPTIONAL)
L10
CB1
1
1
2
3
4
85
87
CB2
1
2
CB3
1
CIR. BREAKER, 20 AMP
VACC2
2
CB4
1
CIR. BREAKER, 15 AMP
VACC3
86
2
CIR. BREAKER., 20 AMP
VACC4
GRN/RED 8-1
ORN/GRN 16-2
ORN/GRN 16-1
30
CB5
1
K4
85
87
RELAY, GLOW PLUG
2
CB6
1
CIR. BREAKER, 10 AMP
VACC5
2
CIR. BREAKER, 15 AMP
IGNITION
VALVE, SIDE SWEEP/SCRUB (S8)
YEL/RED 18-2
C
C
YEL/RED 18-1
BLK 16-9
B
B
BLK 16-8
BRN 16-5
A
B
GRN/BRN 18-6
C
C
GRN/BRN 18-7
D
D
GRN/BRN 18-8
E
E
F
F
X19
M
X21
+
-
B
A
BACK UP ALARM
BRN/YEL 18-1 2
B
BLU/BLK 18-1
A ORN/GRN 18-5
RED/GRA 18-1 2
2
VALVE, SQUEEGEE DOWN (S2)
L3
X34
1
1
2
L6
VALVE, SCRUB CYLINDER LOCK (S6)
L4
VALVE, SCRUB BRUSH (S4)
L7
VALVE, SCRUB PRESSURE UP (S7)
X37
L5
VALVE, SCRUBB PRESSURE DOWN (S5)
2
X33
VALVE, SQUEEGEE UP (S3)
ORN 18-8
ORN/BLU 18-1
WHT/VIO 18-1
2
2
1
2
GRN/BRN 18-6
BRN/GRN 18-1
1
X38
L1
VALVE, VAC FAN (S1)
L2
X35
1
GRN/BRN 18-5 1
H2
X57
1
2
BLK 18-14
1
X32
X36
ORN 18-12
ORN/RED 18-1
D
C
B
A
WHT/GRN 18-1
GRN/RED 18-1
GRN/WHT 18-1
BLK/GRN 18-1
S
R
P
N
M
GRA/BLU 18-1
L
J
K
GRA/ORN 18-1
H
G
F
E
D
A
PINK 16-7
B
B
PINK 16-8
X78
C
C
BLK/RED 16-1
A
D
F
BLU/PINK 16-1
PINK/YEL 16-1
G
GRN/YEL 18-1
J
H
K
L
M
P
M8
-
PUMP, SOLUTION
2
1
SP16
LAMP, RIGHT REAR S/T/T
ORN 18-13
GRN/BRN 18-7 1
N
1
2
+
M
PUMP, WAND
X22
-
2
S8
1
SWITCH, SOLUTION EMPTY
X47
VIO/BLU 18-1
GRA 18-1
BLK 1-1
BLK 4-1
RED 6-3
RED 8-1
1 SP8
YEL/BLU 18-1
WHT
WHT 2
2
2
BATTERY, 12 Vdc
1
LP3
B
-
+
GRN/ORN 18-1
1 2
SP15
R2
2
1
2
LAMP, LEFT REAR S/T/T
X3
GROUND, HYD. TANK
BLK 16-10
2
SENDER, HYDRAULIC OIL TEMP
BLK
RED
GRN/BRN 18-5
BT
M4
-
M
PUMP, MIST
DRIVE PEDAL SENSOR, 5K OHM
+
2
LP4
SWITCH, HYDRAULIC FILTER
A
2
SP17
A
BRN 16-3
BLK 16-9
BLK 16-10
F
X81
A
1
SP18
1
2
BRN 16-4
2
YEL/RED 18-2 1
ORN/BRN 18-1
2
F
GRN/BRN 18-4
R5
1
SP14
BLK
RED
RED/YEL 18-1
ORN/BRN 18-2
SP13
2
BRN 16-5
2
1
BRN 16-4
1
ORN/BRN 18-2 2
X54
D
1
X53
D
S4
E
+
3
A
SWITCH, RECOVERY FULL
E
M5
2
1
VIO/YEL 18-1 A
D
B
C
D
B
B
C
ORN 18-14
BLK 18-13
B
ORN 18-13
A
ORN 18-12
BLU/RED 16-1 A
1
B
S2
B
2
BLU 14-3
B
B
A
B
A
BLK 18-15
GRN/BLU 16-1 B
BLK 18-10
GRN/BRN 18-8 A
PINK 16-5
B
X2
2
A
A
2
B
1
A
F1
X1
X40
BLU 14-1
A
ORN 16-5
2
1
X68
GRA/YEL 18-1 A
SP9
1
2
X60
A BRN/WHT 18-1
LP7
1
1
2
B ORN/GRA 18-1
F
X71
A
A
E
F
BLU 12-1
D
E
C
C
D
BLK 1-1
B
C
PINK 16-6
PINK 16-7
PINK 16-8
A
B
ORN 18-8
RED 1-1
X72
A
ORN 16-5
ORN 16-4
C YEL/GRA 18-1
GRA/BLK 18-1
B
BLK 16-8
BLK 18-15
BLK 18-14
BLK 18-13
BLK 18-11
SENDER, FUEL
3
FUSE, 100 A.
BLK 4-1
2
BEACON
1
2
R3
1
X10
GROUND, ENGINE
S
X50
GROUND, CHASSIS
3
1
ORN 18-14
SWITCH, LOW LPG
4
1
2
NOTE: S5 IS USED
IN PLACE OF R3
ON LPG MODELS
A
2
BLU 14-3
S5
B
R
RED 6-2
PUMP, FUEL
1
ENGINE SYSTEM
SEE SHEET 2
TO GLOW PLUGS
GRN/RED 8-1
BLK/RED 16-1
B
B
TO STARTER
YEL/BLK 16-1 B
M
B
1 SP20
1
-
PINK/YEL 16-1
RED 1-1
+
A
2
2
BLU 14-1
M2
X64
A
E
PINK 16-4
PINK 16-5
PINK 16-6
BLK 18-17
BLK 18-12
ORN/GRN 20-1
BLK 20-1
BLK/YEL 20-1
ORN/BLK 20-1
5
6
7
8
WHT/ORN 18-1
J7
X49
GROUND, CONTROL BOX
3
START/ENGINE RELAY MODULE
RELAY, POWER
2
CIR. BREAKER, 20 AMP
VACC1
VALVE, MAIN SOLUTION
K1
86
4
RED 8-1
-
1
2
PINK 16-4
VIO/BRN 18-1
YEL/WHT 18-1
ORN/GRN 18-3
M
PUMP, EXT. SCRUB
(OPTIONAL)
VIO/BRN 18-1
VIO/BRN 18-2
VIO/GRA 16-2
2
VIO/GRA 16-1
VIO/GRA 16-2
PUMP, CHEMICAL 2
X165
1
BLK 6-2
BLK 16-1
BLK 16-2
BLK 16-3
BLK 16-4
BLK 16-5
BLK 16-6
BLK 18-17
BLK 20-1
BLK 18-1
RED 14-2
PUMP, CHEMICAL 1
A
+
1
2
X166
DASHBOARD GROUND
ORN/GRN 18-3
SP10
2GRN/BRN 18-1
M6
-
M
J6
SWITCH, KEY’
2 ORN/GRN 18-2
BLK 18-1
WHT/BRN 18-1
BLU/PINK 16-1
VIO/GRA 16-1
+
3
4
DASHBOARD PANEL ASSY
2
RED/VIO 12-4
RED/VIO 12-3
RED/VIO 12-2
RED/VIO 12-1
RED/VIO 12-5
M11
-
B1
ORN/GRN 18-5
ORN/GRN 18-4
GRN/BRN 18-1
GRN/BRN 18-2
B
M10
X172
3
B
RED/VIO 12-2
C
S1
BLU 16-1
ORN 16-2
ORN 16-1
D
GRN/BLU 16-1
GRA/RED 16-2
RED/VIO 12-1
E
X46
X171
M
2
SP6
GRN/BRN 18-4
1 1GRN/BRN 18-3
VIO 18-1
F
ORN 16-2
C
S30
SWITCH, SEAT
1
+
1
1
WHT/RED 16-1
BLU/BRN 16-1
1
SP19
ORN/GRN 16-2
ORN 18-18
GRA/RED 16-1
BRN 16-6
GRA/VIO 16-1
2
BLU/GRN 18-1
2
YEL 18-3
BLK 16-5
BLK 16-4
BLACK
RED/VIO 12-4
GRN/VIO 18-2
1
ORN 18-2
ORN 16-3
SP7
1 1
ORN 18-6
GRA/ORN 18-1
GRA/BLU 18-1
YEL 18-1
GRN 18-1
ORN/BRN 18-1
YEL/RED 18-1
GRA/ORN 18-2
RED 14-2
RED 6-3
2
2
2
ORN 16-4
WHT/VIO 18-1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GRA/ORN 18-2
A
YEL/GRN 18-1
GRN/BRN 18-3
ORN/RED 18-1
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
NATURAL
GRN/BRN 18-2
B
B
BLACK
BLU/RED 16-1
RED/WHT 18-1
RED/BLU 18-1
BLK/YEL 18-1
BLK/RED 18-1
YEL/BLK 16-1
WHT/YEL 18-1
VIO 18-1
BLU 16-2
BLU 16-3
BLK 16-6
S29
SWITCH, PUSH BUTTON, HORN
B
C
B
ORN 16-3
SWITCH, BRAKE
1
A
D
A
BLK 16-2
BLK 16-3
B
E
BLK 16-1
X174
BLK 18-22
M7
M
F
RED/BLK 18-1
B
RED/BLK 18-1 A
BLK 18-4
2
A
ORN 18-4
VALVE, SCRUB LIFT (S9)
WHT
A
X173
S6
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
BLU 12-1
BLU 16-1
1
B
B
1
J3
J2
RED/VIO 12-3
BLU/YEL 18-2
A
G
ORN 18-18
X39
2
C
BLK 18-7
X42
A
VIO/BLU 18-1
ORN/GRA 18-1
RED/YEL 18-1
BRN/BLU 18-1
YEL/WHT 18-1
BRN/BLU 18-1
B
VALVE, RIGHT SOLUTION
L9
D
X41
A
BLU/YEL 18-1
BLU/BLK 18-1
ORN 16-1
WHT/ORN 18-1
BLK 18-12
A
E
VIO/WHT 18-1
GRA/YEL 18-1
1
B
H
BLK/WHT 18-2
LAMP, RIGHT FRONT TURN
X7
F
BRN/WHT 18-1
YEL/GRA 18-1
ORN/GRN 18-1
GROUND, CHASSIS
VIO/BRN 18-2
GRN/YEL 18-1
1
X77
YEL 18-2
L11
G
X75
BLK 18-9
GRA/BLK 18-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
BLU/GRN 18-1
BLK/WHT 18-1
GRN/VIO 18-1
YEL/BLU 18-1
RED/GRA 18-1
BRN/GRN 18-1
ORN/BLU 18-1
BRN/YEL 18-1
1
H
SP3
2
SP5
2
SP12
C
GRN/ORN 18-1
VIO/WHT 18-1
VIO/YEL 18-1
WHT/BRN 18-1
RED/VIO 12-5
1
SP4
1
2
YEL 18-3
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
BLK/RED 18-1
BLK
2
BLK/YEL 18-1
LP6
2
1
1
1
RED/BLU 18-1
WHT
2
J1
1
GRN 18-2
LAMP, RIGHT FRONT TURN
BRN 16-3
BRN 16-2
BRN 16-1
BRN 16-6
BLK 18-4
BLK 18-3
BLK 18-8
BLK 18-9
1
X48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A
BLK
GRN 18-1
2
GRA 18-1
BLK/YEL 20-1
ORN/BLK 20-1
GRA/RED 16-1
GRA/RED 16-2
SP1
2
1
2
SP2
2
1
BLK 18-3
A
BLK/WHT 18-1
WHT
LP5
B
A
ORN 18-2
BRN 16-2
LAMP, LEFT HEAD
B
BLU/YEL 18-1
A
GRN 18-2
ORN 18-3
A
BLK 18-8
BLU/YEL 18-2
BLK 18-6
WHT/RED 16-1
X11
B
ORN 18-3
B
WHT/RED 16-2
2
B
LP2
YEL 18-1
5
4
3
BLK 18-5
BLK 18-6
BLK 18-7
BLK 18-11
BLK 18-10
BLK 18-22
X74
C
C
1
X73
C
BLU/BRN 16-1
LAMP, RIGHT HEAD
YEL 18-2
ORN 18-4
BRN 16-1
GRA/VIO 16-1
A
BLU/BRN 16-2
A
GRN/VIO 18-1
BLK 18-5
GRA/VIO 16-2
X12
B
ORN 18-17
B
D
2
GRN/VIO 18-2
LP1
E
1
WHT/YEL 18-1
BLU 16-2
ORN/GRN 18-4
BLU 16-3
2
HORN
BLK 6-2
H1
1
ORN/GRN 16-1
ORN/GRN 18-1
ORN/GRN 18-2
ORN/GRN 20-1
Wiring Harness Schematic, Machine - 56108186 REV A Sheet 1 of 2
81
GRN/RED 8-1
1
1
E3
1
1
E4
RED 1-1
BLK 1-1
BLK 4-1
STARTER
RED 6-2
1
X10.. 2
X1_
4
3
C
B
A
PINK 16-8
PINK 16-7
PINK 16-8
RED 16-1
B
A
X140
M
N
P
R
S
M
N
P
R
S
VIO 18-21
2 2
L
2
2
L
GRA
GRA 18-7
D
K
D
J
GRA 18-6
K
VIO
GRA/BLU 18-1
C
H
C
J
VIO 18-22
H
BLK
GRA/ORN 18-1
RED
B
G
TAN 18-3
A
B
G
E
E
X154
A
BLK 16-13
F
D
RED 16-2
F
C
D
X2_
C
B
A
1
GRA/BRN 18-3
BLK 16-12
C
J
F
BLU/PINK 16-1
L
B
A
C
GRN/WHT 18-1
BLK/GRN 18-1
D
WHT/GRN 18-1
GRN/RED 18-1
S
R
P
N
M
J
K
GRA/BLU 18-1
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
GRA/ORN 18-1
VIO/BLU 18-1
GRA 18-1
PINK 16-7
B
C
BLK/RED 16-1
PINK 16-8
D
PINK/YEL 16-1
E
G
GRN/YEL 18-1
H
X2.
B
GRA/BRN 18-2
D
L
K
B
A
D
SP26
BLK/RED 16-1
D3
2
2
PINK/YEL 16-1
BLU/PINK 16-4
F
E
RED/YEL 18-9
GRN/YEL 18-3
G
GRA 18-7
VIO 18-21
H
RED/YEL 18-8
GRA/BRN 18-3
1
E
X113
F
+
G
2
BLU/PINK 16-1
M13
J
RED/YEL 18-7
GRA/BRN 18-2
D2
2
2
SP23
GRN/YEL 18-1
X158
SWITCH, OIL PRESSURE
J
RED 16-3
C
GRA/BRN 18-1
R7
H
B
K
A GRA/BRN 18-1
L
ALTERNATOR
L
PINK 16-8
K
L X142
P
M
F
2 2
N
RED 12-2
P
RED 6-1
1
M
2
THROTTLE INPUT
(12V FOR 2400 RPM)
THROTTLE INPUT
(12V FOR 2200 RPM)
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT
RUN SIGNAL
IGN. SWITCH INPUT
ALT. EXCITE
FUEL PUMP (-)
FUEL PUMP (+)
START COMMAND
MIL OUTPUT
CAN (-)
CAN (+)
GND
VIO/BLU 18-1
E2
S
1
P
S
1
N
2
C
SENDER, TEMP.
SP24
BLK/YEL 18-1
B
SP22
ORN/BLK 18-1
I/F
P L
TAN 18-3
R
S28
BAT
R
NO
NC
G2
M
STARTER
S
SWITCH, COOLANT TEMP.
P
X10.1
ENGINE GROUND
1
3
RED/YEL 18-7
RED/YEL 18-8
RED/YEL 18-9
GRN/YEL 18-3
1
N
S
GRA 18-1
E1
2
BLK/YEL 18-1
RED 1-1
RED 6-2
S
2
2
BLK 16-12
BLK 16-13
S9 o
t
1
RED 16-3
RED 16-2
RED 16-1
X1.
ORN/BLK 18-1
2
RED 6-1
S
M
R
M1.
30
50 BLU/PINK 16-4
BLK 1-1
BLK 4-1
Service Manual – SC8000
Electrical System
Wiring Harness Schematic, Engine Interface and Kubota Diesel - 56108186 REV A Sheet 2 of 2
KUBOTA ENGINE SYSTEM
REFERENCE:
56107659 DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA LP
GASOLINE
SENSOR
X78.
KUBOTA DIESEL ENGINE SYSTEM
A3
B (+)
ACTUATOR (+)
B (-)
ACTUATOR (-)
SPEED SELECT 1
MAGNETIC PICKUP (+)
SPEED SELECT 2
MAGNETIC PICKUP (-)
SP28
SERVICE TOOL (Rx)
SERVICE TOOL (Tx)
SPEED SELECT 1 = 2400 RPM
SPEED SELECT 2 = 2200 RPM
APECS 3000 GOVERNOR
WHT
GRN
BLU
WHT/BLK
ORN
YEL
82
Service Manual – SC8000
83
Engine System, Diesel
Functional Description
Overview
The diesel SC8000 machines use a Kubota V1505-B-1 four-cylinder diesel engine to power the two hydraulic
pumps that run the machine drive wheel, scrub/sweep systems, vacuum fan motor, the scrub/sweep and
squeegee lift actuators and the steering system. A Woodward APECS 3000 Governor controls the fuel
quantity to maintain the selected RPM or shut the engine off.
Diesel Engine Starter Circuit Diagram
ENGINE START/RUN RELAY PCB J7 for Diesel
Battery (+) From
F1 Fuse 100A & CB6 15A
DRIVE
BOX
START INHIBIT
PIN J1-22
J7-3
J7-7
PIN J1-34
RELAY
PCB
RUN INHIBIT
J7-4
BAT -
PIN J1-10
PIN J1-31
1
PIN J1-11
2
R1
3
DRIVE PEDAL SENSOR
BAT -
BLU/PINK
+ + + + +
M3
+
30
50
+
+
+ + + + + + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
START 3
+
+ + + + + +
+
S1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
+
B1
+
+
+
+
+
IGN
+
+
+
+
J7-1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
RUN
K2
+
+
+
+
K2
+
+ J7-8
+
J7-5 +
- - - +
+
++ + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
K3
+
+
K3
J7-2 +
+
+ + +
+ + + + + +
J7-6
+
- ++ + + + + + + + + +
START
STARTER
PINK
S
I/F
G2
+ + ++
L P
+
+
ALTERNATOR
+
+
+
+
+ RED
B (+)
+ ++
A5
GOVERNOR
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Circuit Description
• For the engine to start:
–– The Key Switch S1 must be set to provide positive voltage to the Glow Plug Relay K4, and to the Relay
PCB to actuate the engine Start Relay and Run Relay contacts.
–– The Start_Inhibit relay must not be energized. This means that the Driver Box is not providing a ground
to the coil through J1-22.
–– The drive pedal must be in the neutral position and the Drive Pedal Sensor must be in the deadband
range.
• For the engine to run:
–– The Ignition_Inhibit relay must not be energized. This means that the Driver Box is not providing a
ground to the coil through J1-34.
–– The Oil Pressure Switch S28 must be open. This switch is a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch.
When the oil pressure is too low, the switch is in the inactivated state (normally-closed contact is
closed). When there is oil pressure, the switch activates so that the normally-open contact will be
closed. The pressure switch is set at 10 psi.
–– The Coolant Temperature Switch S9 must be open. This switch is normally open, and will close when the
coolant temperature reaches 235 degrees F. When the switch closes, it provides a ground to pin J1-25
on the Driver Box.
84
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Component Locations
Oil Pressure Sensor
(above oil filter)
Engine Ground Connection
Coolant Temperature Sensor
(above alternator)
X1 and X2 Electrical Connectors
Governor Engine Speed
Magnetic Pickup
Woodward Governor and
Throttle Actuator
85
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key
switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Engine Oil
Check the engine oil level when the machine is parked on a level surface and the engine is cool. Change
the engine oil after the first 35 hours of operation and every 150 hours after that. Use CF, CF-4 or CG-4 oil
meeting API specifications and suited temperatures.
* Important: Refer to the Diesel Lubricating Oil Note below for further diesel oil recommendations.
Refer to the engine manufacturer’s service manuals for oil capacities and additional engine specifications.
Replace the oil filter with every oil change.
Temperature Range
Oil Weight
Above 77 °F (25 °C)
SAE 30 or 10W-30
32 °F to 77 °F (0 °C to 25 °C)
SAE 20 or 10W-30
Below 32 °F (0 °C)
SAE 10W or 10W-30
* Diesel Lubricating Oil Note:
With the emission control now in effect, the CF-4 and CG-4 lubricating oils have been developed for use
with a low-sulfur fuel used in on-road vehicle engines. When an off-road vehicle engine runs on a highsulfur fuel, it is advisable to employ the CF, CD or CE lubricating oil with a high total base number. If the
CF-4 or CG-4 lubricating oil is used with a high-sulfur fuel, change the lubricating oil at shorter intervals.
Low sulfur
(0.5 % ≥)
High sulfur
Remarks
CF
O
O
TBN ≥ 10
CF-4
O
X
CG-4
O
X
Lubricating
Oil class
Fuel
O = Recommended X = Not Recommended
Engine Coolant
Checking Engine Coolant
Caution! Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
To check the engine coolant level, open and prop the engine cover and observe the coolant level in the coolant
overflow tank. If the level is low, add a 50/50 mix of water and the recommended type antifreeze. Clean the
radiator and oil cooler exteriors every 150 hours by washing with low-pressure water or using compressed
air.
Service Note: The oil cooler tips out for easy cleaning.
86
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Replacing Engine Coolant
One possible cause of engine overheating is trapped air in the cooling system. It’s recommended that you use
a Cooling System Tool when changing the engine coolant. The Cooling System Tool pulls a vacuum on the
cooling system prior to filling to prevent air from being trapped in the cooling system.
Note that there are several types of Cooling System Tools. The following instructions describe how to use a
typical type of tool. Refer to the operating instructions included with your particular tool if different than the
example shown here.
1. Connect a Compressed Air Supply Line
to the fitting on the Cooling System
Tool.
2. Connect the Coolant Supply Line to the
Cooling System Tool. Make sure the
Coolant Valve is closed.
3. Insert and hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck, then
press the Air Switch. The compressed
air travelling through the Venturi Tube
Assembly will pull a vacuum on the
cooling system to remove air from the
system.
4. Once the vacuum reading on the
Gauge reaches approximately 25 on
the green scale, release the Air Switch.
Note that this also a good opportunity
to check for cooling system leaks,
5. Continue to hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck and
open the Coolant Valve to allow coolant
to flow into the radiator.
Compressed Air
Supply Line
Gauge
Air
Switch
Coolant
Valve
(closed)
Venturi
Tube
Assembly
Coolant
Supply
Line
Removing the Air from the Cooling System with Cooling System Tool
Gauge
Coolant
Valve
(open)
6. Once the pressure on the Gauge
reaches approximately 5 on the red
scale and the radiator is almost full,
shut off the Coolant Valve and remove
the Cooling System Tool from the
radiator filler neck.
7. Top off the radiator and overflow tank
as necessary.
Filling Cooling System with Coolant
87
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Engine Air Filter Maintenance
Check the Engine Air Filter Service Indicator before each use of the machine. Do not service the air filter unless
the red flag is visible in the service indicator.
Caution! When servicing the engine air filter elements, use extreme care to prevent loose dust
from entering the engine. Dust can severely damage the engine.
The engine air filter contains a primary (outer) and a safety (inner) filter element. The primary element can
be cleaned twice before being replaced.
The safety element should be replaced every third time that the primary filter element is replaced. Never
attempt to clean the inner safety element.
To clean the primary filter element:
1. Un-snap the two clips at the end of the air filter and remove the end housing.
2. Pull the primary element out.
3. Clean the element with compressed air (maximum pressure 100 psi) or wash it with water (maximum
pressure 40 psi). Do not put the element back into the canister until it is completely dry.
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The yellow attention
light and glow plug
display icon will not
go out.
Glow plug relay K4 coil
over current (fault code 14
displayed on the LCD)
• Check K4 relay coil wiring for problems (+ ORN/
GRN and - WHT/ORN).
All machine systems
shut down.
Coolant temperature high
(fault code 33 displayed on
the LCD).
Refer to the Engine Overheating Problems section
below.
The oil pressure has
dropped to 3-7 psi (fault
code 37 displayed on the
LCD).
Refer to the Loss of Oil Pressure Protection
section below.
General engine fault; engine
temperature is too high,
the oil pressure is low (fault
code 38 displayed on the
LCD).
• Refer to the Engine Overheating Problems
section below.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 36 ohms,
replace. Also see diesel glow plug starting circuit
electrical ladder detail.
• Refer to the Loss of Oil Pressure Protection
section below.
Engine Overheating Problems
Use the checklist below as a guide to thoroughly check the engine cooling system.
• Check the coolant level in the overflow tank and radiator.
• Inspect and clean the radiator and hydraulic oil cooler.
88
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
• Check for correct operation of the belt-driven engine cooling fan (slippage).
• Check to see that the engine thermostat opens.
• Check for correct water pump operation.
• Check the engine crankcase oil level.
• Check for air trapped in the cooling system. (Refer to the Engine Coolant/Replacing Engine Coolant
section.)
Loss of Oil Pressure Protection
The engine will shut down if the oil pressure drops to 3-7 psi. Check for possible causes for low oil pressure
such as:
• Engine crankcase oil level is low.
• Incorrect oil viscosity.
• Fault in oil pressure switch S28.
• Excessive engine wear or defective internal oil pump (relief valve).
Engine Will Not Crank - Start Inhibit Active
• Drive pedal sensor switch R1 not calibrated; follow programming instructions to calibrate foot pedal
sensor.
• Drive pedal activated out of neutral (out of the calibrated deadband range):
–– Remove foot from drive pedal.
–– Adjust or repair the Hydroback/cable and/or main piston (propulsion) pump linkage.
• The control panel displays the critical fault icon showing
code #38. See the General Troubleshooting section for an
explanation and correction.
Engine Stops Running - Run InhibitActive
• Loss of the engine run signal input to the main control board Pin # J1-1 (GRA). Note that a good diesel
(Kubota) engine run signal will test 12V when measured (referenced) to B- ground. The run signal is lost
when the voltage reads 0V.
• The control panel displays the critical fault icon showing
code #38. See the General Troubleshooting section for an
explanation and correction.
89
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Diesel Engine Will Not Run at High Speed or Turbo Speed
Conditions:
• With the engine running at idle, press the engine speed switch. (Note that when the speed switch
indicator light is not on, the engine will run at low idle.) The indicator will turn green and the engine will
run at high speed (2200 rpm).
• Hold the engine speed switch for more than two seconds and the engine will run at its highest turbo speed
(2400 rpm).
• Press the engine speed switch again and the engine will revert back to high speed.
• Press the switch again and the engine will revert to idle. See additional troubleshooting notes for control
circuit details.
RED
(Engine Run Signal)
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
S28
Run Relay Out J7-5
Ref: Engine Start/Run
Relay for more detail
GRA
B+
WOODWARD
GOVERNOR
B-
- - - -
SPEED 1 (2400)
SPEED 2 (2200)
FUEL RAIL & SHUT
DOWN ACTUATOR
Mounts to Engine
Injector Pump
TO ENGINE FLYWHEEL
MAGNETIC PICKUP
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
(SHOWN IN LOW
PRESSURE STATE)
DIAGNOSTIC
SERVICE TOOL
CONNECTOR
Component
Current Amps
Coil Ohms
Actuator
1-1.5 Amps
3.2 ohms
Wire Color
Function
Voltage at
1300 RPM
J2-30 on Driver Box
GRA/BLU
Input from Driver Box
J2-29 on Driver Box
GRA/ORN
Input from Driver Box
Pin#
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PIN J7-5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + +
+
+
+
+
S1
+
+
DRIVER BOX
+12V
+
+
PIN J1-1
+
VIO
PIN J2-30
+
+
RELAY PCB
PIN J2-29
PIN J7-1 + + +
Voltage at
2200 RPM
Voltage at
2400 RPM
0
0
+12 VDC
0
+12 VDC
0
90
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Troubleshooting the Kubota Engine Speed Governing System
Follow these procedures if the engine will not run at operating speed (2200 RPM) or high speed (2400 RPM).
Governor – APECS 3000, manufactured by Woodward (manual # SE-4049). Additional information can be
found on their website.
To check the electrical control circuit:
1. With key switch on, check for battery voltage at the governor control box (B+ and B-) inputs. The correct
value is 12 VDC.
2. Press the engine speed selection button (located on the operator control panel) with engine cranking/
running and test for 12 VDC at the governor speed select inputs 1 and 2. (See the ladder diagram for
speed selection voltage relationships.)
• If 0 volts, check the continuity of the speed select input wiring from the governor to the Driver Box
(main controller).
• If wiring check is OK, substitute a new Driver Box (main controller) and Dashboard Panel.
3. Check the status lamp on the governor for fault codes. Reference the flash code table found on the
APECS 3000 website.
4. Test governor controller actuator output voltage at different speed selection modes (approximate value
3.9 VDC).
5. Check the continuity of the fuel control actuator wiring.
6. Test the Fuel Solenoid Actuator (see below) for an open circuit (the specification is 3.2 ohms).
7. With the engine cranking or running, check the governor magnetic pickup (RPM speed sensor) voltage
signal (see the table below).
8. Remove and inspect the magnetic speed pickup sensor for damage. When reinstalling, thread the sensor
in until it makes contact with the flywheel, then back it out one-half turn.
Table for APECS 3000 Governor Magnetic Pickup Sensor AC Voltage Values
Test condition
Approximate AC Voltage Value
Cranking
10-11 VAC
1300 RPM , Idle
34 VAC
2200 RPM, High Speed
44 VAC
2400 RPM, Turbo Speed
46 VAC
Approximate resistance value
Magnetic pick up sensor
2100K Ohms
91
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Specifications
Engine Specifications
Kubota V1505-B-1
Engine Type
Vertical, liquid cooled, four-cylinder, four-cycle diesel engine,
turbo-charged
Displacement
91.41 cubic inches [1498cc]
Fuel
Diesel fuel No. 2-D (ASTM D975)
Injection Pump
Bosch MD type mini pump
Engine firing order
1-3-4-2
Injection Timing
19 degrees before TDC
Oil Capacity
5.5 qt. [5.2L] / Oil Pan depth 4.9” [12.4 cm]
Cooling Capacity
8 qt. [7.5L]
Horsepower
46 gross @2800 RPM, 41 Int @2400 RPM
Idle – 1300 RPM
Engine Speeds
Normal Run – 2200 RPM
High Output Turbo – 2400 RPM
Current – 1 to 1.5 amps
Actuator
Coil Resistance – 3.2 ohms
Note: Refer to the engine manufacturer’s Operator and Service manuals for more detailed engine
specifications and service data.
92
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, Diesel
Connector Callout – Relay PCB
Pin#
Color
Type
Voltage
Pin Description and Function
J7-1
VIO/GRA
Input
B+
Module relays load power supply
J7-2
BLU/PINK
Output
B+
Engine ECU starter relay command
J7-3
WHT/BRN
Input
0V Floats
Engine start inhibit signal *
J7-4
BLK
Input
B-
Module relays coil ground supply
J7-5
PINK
Output
B+
Engine ECU ignition run relay command
J7-6
VIO/BRN
Input
B+
Module starter relay Bat +coil signal
J7-7
YEL/WHT
Input
0V Floats
J7-8
ORN/GRN
Input
B+
Engine run inhibit signal **
Module ignition relay Bat+ coil signal
* Note: The normal condition for the start inhibit is in its non-inhibited state. A float voltage of
approximately 8V (when referenced to B-) is measured when the key is in the start position.
When inhibited, the signal is pulled to ground, will read 0V and will prevent the engine
from cranking. This prevents the starter relay from being energized.
** Note:The normal condition for the run inhibit is its non-inhibited state. A float voltage of
approximately 10V (when referenced to B-) is measured when the key is in the start/run
and run positions. When inhibited, the signal is pulled to ground, will read 0V and will
prevent the engine ECU from receiving its needed input switch command. This prevents
the ignition system from firing, and if the engine is running will cause it to shut down.
Special Tools
Cooling System Tool
93
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Functional Description
The LPG SC8000 machines use a four-cylinder 1.6L Kubota WG1605-L-E3 engine that is liquid cooled
and and naturally aspirated to power the two hydraulic pumps that run the machine drive wheel, scrub/
sweep systems, vacuum fan motor, the scrub/sweep and squeegee lift actuators and the steering system.
An E-controls Engine Management System modifies the fuel mixture based on feedback input from oxygen
sensors, and also controls the electonic throttle and ignition system.
Overview
The LPG SC8000 machines use a four-cylinder 1.6L WG 1605 Kubota engine to drive two hydraulic pumps.
Note: Also refer to the following manufacturer’s technical literature for the WG 1605 Kubota Engine:
• Engine Operator’s Manual WG1605 EG523-89162ENG.pdf
• Engine Specifications WG1605 9Y110-01770.pdf
• Engine Workshop Manual WG1605 9Y111-06610.pdf
• Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf
Kubota 1.6L LPG Fuel System Description
The fuel system on LPG engines includes an LPG Fuel Lock-off device, Dual Stage Regulator (DSR), Direct
Electronic Pressure Regulator (DEPR), Mixer Assembly and Electronic Throttle Body (ETB).
An LPG Fuel Lock-off device, consisting of a 12 volt solenoid and a normally-closed valve, opens during
cranking and engine run cycles. The ECM controls the voltage to the LPG Fuel Lock-off device.
The DSR is a two-stage regulator that is a combination vaporizer, pressure regulating device. The DSR is
normally closed when the engine is not running. When the engine is cranking or running, a partial vacuum
is created in the fuel line which connects the regulator to the DEPR and Mixer Assembly. This partial
vacuum opens the second stage regulator, permitting fuel to flow to the DEPR and Mixer Assembly.
The DEPR controls the fuel flow, and provides the correct air/fuel mixture to maintain performance and
emissions control. The DEPR uses an internal computer, and fuel pressure and temperature sensors to
provide input to the ECM for fuel calculation, fault detection and diagnostics.
The Mixer Assembly is a self-contained air/fuel metering device that utilizes a relatively constant pressure
drop to draw fuel into the mixer from cranking to full load. The Mixer Assembly is mounted in the air
stream, ahead of the ETB.
The ETB uses an electric motor, connected to the throttle shaft, to increase or decrease the angle of the
throttle blade. The ECM sends electrical signals to the motor in the ETB to increase or decrease the airflow
to the engine to control the engine speed.
Note: For a more detailed and thorough description of the LPG fuel systems, refer to the Diagnosis
Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf.
94
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Engine Start and Run Circuit Description
In between the Drive Box and the Engine system is a “Relay PCB”. It is a small printed circuit board with
two relays on it. One of the relays provides power out to the engine system to turn it on (or off). The other
relay provides power out to the engine starter when the key is turned to the crank position and the drive
pedal is in the neutral position.
ENGINE START/RUN RELAY PCB J7
Requirements:
1. First turn the S1 Key Switch to “Start” position, then released to it’s “Run” position.
2. Foot pedal in Neutral.
Battery (+) From
F1 Fuse 100A & CB6 15A
+
+ + + + + + +
+
+
+
+
START 3
+
+ + + + + +
S1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
+
++ + +
B1
+
+
+
+
IGN
+
+
+
+
J7-1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
K2
+
+
+
+
+
K2
+
+ J7-8
+
+
+
J7-5
- - - +
+
++ + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + ++
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
K3
+
K3
J7-2
+
+
+ + +
+ + + + + + +
J7-6
+
- ++ + + + + + + + + +
DRIVE
BOX
START INHIBIT
PIN J1-22
START COMMAND TO
STARTER RELAY
IGN. SW INPUT
ALT. EXCITE
J7-3
J7-7
PIN J1-34
RELAY
PCB
RUN INHIBIT
J7-4
BAT -
PIN J1-10
PIN J1-31
1
PIN J1-11
2
R1
3
DRIVE PEDAL SENSOR
BAT -
Circuit Description
• For the engine to start:
• The Key Switch S1 must provide positive voltage to the START relay coil K3 and the IGN relay coil K2.
• The K2 RELAY CONTROL SWITCH must be closed to provide a ground to the IGN relay coil K2. This closes
the K2 relay contacts to provide positive voltage to the IGN. SW INPUT. Note that if the Driver Box sends
a RUN INHIBIT signal from J1-34 to the K2 RELAY CONTROL SWITCH to open the switch, no ground will
be provided to the IGN relay coil K2, the K2 contacts will not close and no positive voltage will be sent to
the IGN. SW INPUT.
• The K3 RELAY CONTROL SWITCH must be closed to provide a ground to the START relay coil K3. This
closes the K3 relay contacts to provide positive voltage to the START COMMAND TO STARTER RELAY.
95
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Note that if the Driver Box sends a START INHIBIT signal from J1-22 to the K3 RELAY CONTROL SWITCH
to open the switch, no ground will be provided to the START relay coil K3, the K3 contacts will not close
and no positive voltage will be sent to the START COMMAND TO STARTER RELAY.
• The drive pedal must be in the neutral position and the Drive Pedal Sensor must be in the deadband
range.
• For the engine to run:
• The K2 RELAY CONTROL SWITCH must remain closed to provide a ground to the IGN relay coil K2. This
keeps the K2 relay contacts closed to maintain positive voltage to the IGN. SW INPUT.
• The Coolant Temperature Output must not provide an “overheat” signal to pin J1-30 on the Driver Box.
The engine coolant temperature sensor is a temperature-sensitive resistor. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds 225 degrees F. for more than five seconds, the Engine System senses the
threshold resistance in the coolant temperature sensor. The Engine System then provides a Coolant
Temperature Output signal to pin J1-30 to generate a fault code and shut the engine off.
• The Low LP Pressure Switch S5 must be open to indicate adequate LP fuel supply (LPG engines only).
Note: LPG engines will continue to run for a few seconds after the key switch is turned off. This burns
any fuel remaining in the engine to prevent backfires the next time the engine is started. When the
key switch is turned off, the Engine System switches off the fuel supply to the engine, but keeps the
ignition system on until it senses that the engine has stopped running.
Engine Protection – Low Oil Pressure Shutdown
The engine controller monitors the oil pressure switch. If it sees a loss of oil pressure, it will shut down the
engine immediately.
Engine Protection – High Temperature
The engine controller monitors the engine coolant temperature. If the temperature reaches 230 deg. F. (110
deg. C.), it will derate the engine power by 30%. If the temperature reaches 240 deg. F. (115 deg. C.), it will
shut down the engine.
Engine Speed Control
The operator can request three engine speeds, “idle” (1200 RPM), “run” (2200 RPM) and “maximum”
(2400 RPM). The Engine Controller operates an Electronic Throttle Body to adjust and maintain engine
speed according to the requested input of the Main Machine Controller. To request the three different
engine speeds, the Main Machine Controller (Driver Box) uses two wires that are connected to the Engine
Controller. It either applies 0v or 12v to each wire to request the specific speeds. See table below.
Pin#
Wire
Color
Function
Voltage at
1200 RPM
Voltage at
2200 RPM
Voltage at
2400 RPM
J2-30 on Driver Box
GRA/BLU
Input from Driver Box
0
0
+12 VDC
J2-29 on Driver Box
GRA/ORN
Input from Driver Box
0
+12 VDC
0
96
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Component Locations
LPG Electrical Components
Note: Some of the photos in this section are of an engine before it is installed in the machine for better visual
clarity.The engine is fitted for a different model machine (SW8000) so some details are slightly different like
the air cleaner, air inlet and exhaust.
The following components are included in this section:
• Alternator
• Ignition Coils
• Electronic Throttle Body
• Knock Sensor
• Cam Position Sensor
• LP Dual Stage Pressure Regulator
• Connector 1
• Mixer Assembly
• Connector 2
• Oil Pressure Switch
• Crank Position Sensor
• Post Catalyst O2 Sensor
• DEPR - Direct Electronic Pressure Regulator
• Diagnostic Connector
• Power Relay (Inside Engine Fuse/Relay Box)
• Pre Catalyst O2 Sensor
• Engine Control Module
• Starter
• Engine Coolant Sensor
• Starter Relay (Inside Engine Fuse/Relay Box)
• Fuel Lockoff Solenoid
• TMAP Sensor
• Ground
Figure 1. Left Side
Engine Control
Module
Electronic
Throttle Body
Knock Sensor
Crank Position
Sensor
Connector 1
and
Connector 2
97
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Alternator
Oil Pressure
Switch
Starter
Oil Filter
Figure 2. Right Side
Diagnostic
Connector
TMAP
Sensor
Engine Fuse/
Relay Box
Ignition Coils
Figure 3. Top
98
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Figure 5. Top, Rear
Figure 4. Top, Front
Engine Coolant
Sensor
Ground
Alternator
Mixer Assembly
Direct Electronic
Pressure Regulator
(DEPR)
Cam Position
Sensor
Pre-Catalyst
O2 Sensor
Post-Catalyst
O2 Sensor
Oil Filter
Right Rear
Wheel
Figure 6. Oxygen Sensors
Fuel Lockoff
Solenoid
LP Dual Stage
Pressure Regulator
Figure 7. Top, Left Front
99
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is
off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Maintenance Schedule
Item
Service Interval
Every
8 hrs
(daily).
Check engine oil level
X
Check and replenish coolant
X
Check and clean air filter element
if
necessary
Check LPG tank setting condition
if
necessary
Check LPG fuel connector
Every
50 hrs
(weekly)
Every
100 hrs
Every
150 hrs
X
* Replace oil filter cartridge
X
X
Check fuel filter
X
Check fan belt tension and for
damage
X
Check battery electrolyte level
X
Every
Two
Years
if
necessary
Check LPG tank setting condition
X
Check radiator hoses and clamp
bands
X
Check PCV valve
X
Check coolant hose of LPG
vaporizer
X
Check LPG Lock off valve
X
Check valve clearance
X
Replace spark plugs
Every
Year
X
Clean spark plugs
Replace fuel filter
Every
2000 hrs
X
* Change engine oil
Check LPG fuel hose and clamp
bands
Every
1000 hrs
X
** Replace air cleaner element
X
Clean water jacket and radiator
interior
X
Replace intake air line
X
Replace breather hose
X
Replace LPG fuel hose and
clamp bands
X
Replace coolant hose of LPG
vaporizer
X
100
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Item
Service Interval
Every
8 hrs
(daily).
Every
50 hrs
(weekly)
Every
100 hrs
Every
150 hrs
Every
1000 hrs
Every
2000 hrs
Every
Year
Every
Two
Years
*** Check LPG vaporizer
X
Replace radiator hoses and
clamp bands
X
Change radiator coolant
X
Replace battery
X
* Change the engine oil and filter cartridge after the first 35 hours of operation.
** Change more often when operating under dusty conditions.
***If you do not have the correct tools and/or are not mechanically proficient, contact your local KUBOTA
dealer.
Engine Oil
Check the engine oil level when the machine is parked on a level surface and the engine is cool. Change
the engine oil after the first 35 hours of operation and every 150 hours after that. Engine oil should have
properties of API classification SL or higher and be suited to the ambient temperature as listed below. Refer
to the engine manufacturer’s service manuals for oil capacities and additional engine specifications. Replace
the oil filter with every oil change.
Temperature Range
Oil Weight
Above 77° F [25° C]
SAE30, SAE10W-30 or SAE15W-40
32° F to 77° F [0° C to 25° C]
SAE20 or SAE 10W-30
-4° F to 32° F [-20° C to 0° C]
SAE10 or SAE 10W-30
Engine Coolant
Checking Engine Coolant
Caution! Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
To check the engine coolant level, open the engine cover and observe the coolant level in the coolant overflow
tank. If the level is low, add a 50/50 mix of water and the recommended type antifreeze. Clean the radiator
and oil cooler exteriors every 150 hours by washing with low-pressure water or using compressed air.
High-pressure water will damage the radiator.
Service Note: The oil cooler tips out for easy cleaning of both the oil cooler and the radiator.
101
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Replacing Engine Coolant
One possible cause of engine overheating is trapped air in the cooling system. It’s recommended that you use
a Cooling System Tool when changing the engine coolant. The Cooling System Tool pulls a vacuum on the
cooling system prior to filling to prevent air from being trapped in the cooling system.
Note that there are several types of Cooling System Tools. The following instructions describe how to use a
typical type of tool. Refer to the operating instructions included with your particular tool if different than the
example shown here.
1. Connect a Compressed Air Supply Line
to the fitting on the Cooling System
Tool.
2. Connect the Coolant Supply Line to the
Cooling System Tool. Make sure the
Coolant Valve is closed.
3. Insert and hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck, then
press the Air Switch. The compressed
air travelling through the Venturi Tube
Assembly will pull a vacuum on the
cooling system to remove air from the
system.
4. Once the vacuum reading on the
Gauge reaches approximately 25 on
the green scale, release the Air Switch.
Note that this also a good opportunity
to check for cooling system leaks,
5. Continue to hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck and
open the Coolant Valve to allow coolant
to flow into the radiator.
Compressed Air
Supply Line
Gauge
Air
Switch
Coolant
Valve
(closed)
Venturi
Tube
Assembly
Coolant
Supply
Line
Removing the Air from the Cooling System with Cooling System Tool
Gauge
Coolant
Valve
(open)
6. Once the pressure on the Gauge
reaches approximately 5 on the red
scale and the radiator is almost full,
shut off the Coolant Valve and remove
the Cooling System Tool from the
radiator filler neck.
7. Top off the radiator and overflow tank
as necessary.
Filling Cooling System with Coolant
102
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Engine Air Filter Maintenance
Caution! When servicing the engine air filter elements, use extreme care to prevent loose dust from
entering the engine. Dust can severely damage the engine.
Service the air cleaner more frequently under severe dusty or dirty conditions.
1. Remove the air cleaner elements from the air cleaner assembly and inspect them for foreign material
restrictions or signs of excessive wear or damage. Replace the elements if necessary.
2. Remove all dust and foreign matter from the air cleaner housing.
3. Reinstall the air cleaner elements.
4. Reinstall the air cleaner cup, then securely fasten the retaining clips
Troubleshooting
The EControls engine management package supports robust self diagnostics and is capable of setting scores
of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). DTCs and sensor data can be viewed on a coputer using the “GCP
Display” software along with an “ECom” communication cable. See the Diagnosis Manual ECM System
WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf for the diagnostic tool connection procedure.
The ECom cable can be purchased through Nilfisk-Advance. (See Special Tools in this section for the part
number). It is the same cable that has been used on other recent Nilfisk-Advance machines using the GM
1.6L and GM 3.0L engines. You will need a new version of the GCP software to work with the Kubota
WG1605 engine along with the correlating password. The software, password and installation instructions
can all be downloaded from “Customer Zone”at www.advance-us.com.
Most or all engine troubleshooting is covered in Kubota manuals. There are some things specific to the
SW8000 engine application which are covered here in this manual section such as, engine speed control and
engine starter operation.
Note: Refer to the Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf, for engine
troubleshooting information and procedures including all fault code diagnosis.
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The engine will not
crank.
Weak battery, poor battery
cable connections.
• Check the battery and connections and clean/repair
as necessary.
• Check the wiring from the battery to the Starter B+
terminal on the A3 Engine System and repair as
necessary.
No power to the Starter
Solenoid (Starter Command
circuit)
• Make sure the foot pedal is in the neutral position.
• Reset the foot pedal deadband position if necessary.
(Refer to the Control System, / Main Machine
Controller Programming section.)
• Make sure there is continuity through the Neutral
Relay K4 contacts 30 and 87a (relay off).
• Check the starter relay operation
• Check circuit breaker CB1 and reset if necessary.
• Check circuit breaker CB3 and reset if necessary.
103
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Problem
Cause
Correction
The engine will not
start.
No power to the Ign. Switch
Input terminal on the A3
Engine System.
• Check circuit breaker CB5 and reset if necessary.
• Check the continuity from the Ignition Switch to the
Ign. Switch Input terminal on the A3 Engine System
and repair as necessary.
Engine will not run at
high speed.
Loss of throttle input from
Main Machine Controller to
Engine Controller
Engine System Problem
• Check that a voltage signal is being sent to the
engine controller when the Throttle Switch is set to
operating speed.
• Refer to Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605
9Y110-01760.pdf
The engine stops
running, check engine
light is on.
The coolant temperature is too Refer to the Engine Overheating Problems section
high.
below.
The oil pressure has dropped
too low.
Refer to the Loss of Oil Pressure Protection section
below.
Engine Management System
Problem
Consult Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605
9Y110-01760.pdf
Engine Overheating Problems
Use the checklist below as a guide to thoroughly check the engine cooling system.
• Check the coolant level in the overflow tank and radiator.
• Inspect and clean the radiator and hydraulic oil cooler.
• Check for correct operation of the belt-driven engine cooling fan (slippage).
• Check to see that the engine thermostat opens.
• Check for correct water pump operation.
• Check the engine crankcase oil level.
• Check for air trapped in the cooling system. (Refer to the Engine Coolant/Replacing Engine Coolant
section.)
• Check the engine coolant sensor for correct function as replace if necessary.
• Check for combustion gasses in the coolaning system.
104
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Specifications
WG1605-L-E3
Model
LPG fuel
Number of Cylinders
Type
Four
Vertical, water cooled, four-cycle LPG engine
Bore × Stroke
79.0 × 78.4 mm (3.11 × 3.09 in.)
Total Displacement
1.537 L (93.79 cu.in.)
Cylinder Head
Ignition System
Overhead-Valve
Full Transistor Battery Ignition Type
Governor
Direction of Rotation
Spark Plug Type/Spark Plug Gap
Electronic Governor
Counterclockwise (Viewed from Flywheel Side)
NGK IFR6F8DN; 0.70 to 0.80 mm (0.028 to 0.031 in.)
0.35 rad (20 °) before T.D.C.
Ignition Timing.
3000 min-1 (rpm), 3600 min-1 (rpm)
0.17 rad (10 °) before T.D.C.
750 min-1 (rpm), 800 min-1 (rpm)
Firing Order
1-3-4-2
Compression Ratio
9.1: 1
Lubricating System
Forced Lubrication by Trochoid Pump
Oil Pressure Indication
Engine Oil Pressure (Hot)
At Idle Speed
At Rated Speed
Lubricating Filter
Cooling System Type
Starting System
Starting Motor
Battery
Charging Alternator
Fuel
Lubricating Oil
Electrical Type Switch
Factory Specification
Allowable Limit
49 kPa
0.50 kgf/cm2
7.1 psi
–
196 to 441 kPa
2.00 to 4.49 kgf/cm2
28.5 to 63.9 psi
147 kPa
1.50 kgf/cm2
21.3 psi
Full Flow Paper Filter (Cartridge Type)
Pressurized Radiator, Forced Circulation with Water Pump
Electric Starting with Starter
12 V, 1.0 kW
12 V, 52 AH or Equivalent
12 V, 480 W, 720 W
Commercial LPG
Better than SL Class (API) SAE 10W-30
Lubricating Oil Capacity
6.0 L (1.6 U.S.gals)
Catalytic Muffler / Converter
Three-way Catalyst
Weight (Dry)
Kubota Recommended LPG Fuel
Specifications
120 kg (265 lbs)
Commercial Propane gas only, Equivalent to Propanes H-D-5 of GPA*
standards
105
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Shop Measurements
The following information was gathered by measuring one machine. While the values recorded cannot serve
as “true specifications” they may help you recognize what normal looks like and give you some standard of
comparison.
Engine Vacuum
17.5-18 “HG (59-61kPa)-at warm idle. Measured at approximately 900 ft. elevation
LP Fuel Pressure
• Primary - Approximately 3 psi (20 kPa)
• Secondary - Approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
Ignition Output
while
cranking
WaveStar30:KV
CKP
and
CMP Running Page: 1
Cam Sensor and Crank Sensor Oscilloscope Pattern
106
Service Manual – SC8000
Engine System, LPG
Special Tools
Diagnostic Communication Cable and software, p/n 56305647
Note: The “Ecom” cable is used but the software on the
CD is for the GM engines. New software must
be ordered or downloaded from Customer Zone
to use on the Kubota engine..
Cooling System Tool
CD containing Kubota Engine Software p/n 56107764
Not Shown
107
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Functional Description
Overview
The hydraulic system powers the drive wheel motor, scrub brushes, vacuum fan and side brush/brooms (if
the machine is so equipped). The hydraulic system also actuates the main scrub deck and side brush/broom
lift cylinders, the squeegee lift cylinder and the drive wheel steering assembly.
The engine drives the two hydraulic pumps that send the hydraulic oil to the various components:
• The main piston (propulsion) pump (1.44 CIR) is a variable-displacement pump that powers the drive
wheel.
• The dual-displacement, low-speed (accessory) pump is actually two separate pumps in one unit (1.20 and
0.58 CIR) and powers the other machine components.
A system of electrically-controlled solenoid valves directs the hydraulic oil to the various system components
to perform the needed scrubbing/sweeping and solution recovery functions.
Note: The electrical wiring diagrams/schematics use an “L” followed by a number to identify the
solenoid (coil) portion of a solenoid valve. The hydraulic schematic uses an “S” followed by a
number to identify the corresponding cartridge (hydraulic valve). This pairing of numbers is
used to establish the connection between the solenoid coils and their corresponding hydraulic
valves. For instance, solenoid coil L6 is mounted on hydraulic valve S6 and controls
hydraulic valve S6.
108
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Electrical Schematic
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
30
1
Relay, Power
CB5
F1
Battery
2
Fuse, 100A
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 10A
2
B
3
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
K1
J2-1
J2-23 (VACC5)
J2-12 (VACC4)
Relay, Power
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
L1
1
2
J2-8
Bat -
Vacuum Fan S1
Driver Box
L2
1
2
J2-5
Bat -
Squeegee Down S2
L3
1
2
J2-6
Bat J6-1 (B+)
Squeegee Up S3
L10
1
2
J2-22
Bat -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
Valve, Main Solution
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN Twisted Pair
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
L11
1
2
J2-10
Bat -
Valve, Right Solution
L4
1
2
J2-7
Bat -
Scrub Brush S4
L7
1
2
J2-24
Bat -
Scrub Pressure Proportional Up (S7)
L5
1
2
J2-26
R2
Bat J1-19
Scrub Pressure Proportional Down (S5)
Sender, Hydraulic Oil Temp.
L6
1
2
1
2
J2-4
Bat -
Scrub Cylinder Lock (S6)
L9
1
J1-32
2
J2-3
Bat -
1
S4
2
Switch, Hydraulic Filter
(closes when the hydraulic filter is plugged)
Side Scrub Lift (S9)
L8
1
2
J2-2
Bat -
J1-18
Side Sweep/Scrub (S8)
Electrical Circuit Description
• For the actuators to lower the scrub deck and squeegee, the Driver Box must receive a signal from the
Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has actuated the scrub system.
• For the vacuum fan to run, the Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the
drive pedal has been moved from the neutral position.
• The Hydraulic Oil Temp. Sender R2 must be within the correct resistance range that indicates the hydraulic
oil is within the acceptable temperature range. Note that R2 has a variable resistance to ground, 12 to 500
ohms. The voltage when active is 0.16-2.24 volts.
• The Hydraulic Filter Switch S4 must be open to indicate that the hydraulic filter is not plugged.
109
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic Schematic
Hydraulic System
110
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Component Locations
Major Components
Hydraulic
Motor
Assembly
Pump
Assembly
Fan Motor
Assembly
Steer
Cylinder
Assembly
Steering
Pump
Assembly
Pump
Assembly,
Low-speed
nt
Fro
Drive
Motor
Assembly
Valve
Block
Assembly
Reservoir
Assembly
Hydraulic
Motor
Assembly
Oil
Filter
Squeegee
Cylinder
Assembly
Oil
Cooler
Assembly
Scrub Lift
Cylinder
Assembly
111
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Cylinders
The Squeegee Cylinder
Assembly, Steer Cylinder
Assembly and Scrub Lift
Cylinder Assembly are
located as shown.
Steer
Cylinder
Assembly
Squeegee
Cylinder
Assembly
Scrub Lift
Cylinder
Assembly
Hydraulic Motors
The Vacuum Fan Motor
Assembly, Steering Pump
Assembly, Drive Motor
Assembly and Main Brush
Motor Assembly are located
as shown.
Vacuum
Fan
Motor
Assembly
Main
Brush
Motor
Assembly
Steering
Pump
Assembly
Drive
Motor
Assembly
112
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Pumps
The Propulsion (transport) Piston Pump
Assembly and Accessory Pump Assembly
are connected to the engine output shaft
and are located as shown. The Accessory
Pump Assembly includes the two auxiliary
hydraulic pumps.
Propulsion (transport)
Piston Pump Assembly
Accessory Pump
Assembly
Hydraulic Valve Block/Manifold
The Hydraulic Valve Block/
Manifold is located on the back
of the machine as shown
Bottom View
Hydraulic
Valve Block/
Manifold
Front
113
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
The Solenoid Valves and
System Relief Valves are
located on the Hydraulic
Valve Block/Manifold as
shown.
S1
S4
S7
S2 (top
S3 (bottom)
114
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
The Right Side Scrub/Sweep Solenoid Valve
S8/L8 controls the right side scrub/sweep
motor(s). S8/L8 is located above the front
end of the Scrub Deck.
Scrub
Deck
S8/L8
The Right Side Scrub Lift Cylinder Solenoid
Valve S9/L9 controls the side scrub lift
cylinder. S9/L9 is located inboard of the
Right Scrub Assembly.
S9/L9
Right Scrub
Assembly
115
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly Component Location Key
Item#
Component Description and Hydraulic Circuit Function
LI/S1
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, vacuum fan motor, coil 8 ohms
L2/S2
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, squeegee lift cylinder DOWN (top), coil 8 ohms
L3/S3
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, squeegee lift cylinder UP (bottom), coil 8 ohms
L4/S4
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, scrub/sweep system motors, coil 8 ohms
L5/S5
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, scrub pressure DN, proportional relief, coil 2.2
ohms
L6/S6
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, scrub lift cylinder lock, coil 8 ohms
L7/S7
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, scrub pressure UP, proportional relief coil 2.2
ohms
R1
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, pressure relief, vacuum fan, 2700 psi
R2
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, pressure relief, scrub brush(s), 2700 psi
L8/S8
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, right scrub/sweep system, coil 8 ohms
L9/S9
Solenoid coil and valve cartridge, right scrub lift cylinder, coil 8 ohms
Note: The combined electrical solenoid and hydraulic valve cartridge assembly can be serviced
separately.
Service Notes: The S1, S2, S3, S4 and S6 solenoid coils w/connectors are the same, and the
S5 and S7 solenoid coils w/connectors are the same, and can be swapped for
troubleshooting purposes.
The S8 and S9 solenoid coils w/connectors are both different and only one of each
is used.
The S1 and S4 valve cartridges are the same, the S2 and S3 valve cartridges are
the same, and can be swapped for troubleshooting purposes.
The S5, S6, S7, S8 and S9 valve cartridges are all different and only one of each is
used.
116
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key
switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Hydraulic Oil
1. Open and prop the engine cover to access the
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir.
2. Remove the Fill Cap from the tank and look to
the bottom of the filler screen. If the oil level
is below the bottom of the filler screen, add
10W-30 motor oil until the bottom of the filler
screen is covered. (The oil level should not be
higher than ½” [12.7 mm] above the bottom of
the filler screen.)
Fill
Cap
Hydraulic
Oil
Reservoir
3. Change and flush the oil if major
contamination from a mechanical failure
occurs.
Hydraulic Oil FIlter
1. Release the latches and tip the
Hydraulic Oil Cooler out away from the
machine.
2. Use a pan or other suitable container
to catch any oil that may leak out
when you remove the Hydraulic Oil
Filter.
3. Unscrew and remove the Hydraulic Oil
Filter.
Hydraulic
Oil
Filter
4. Install the new Hydraulic Oil Filter.
5. Tip the Hydraulic Oil Cooler back up
into position, then secure the latches.
6. Run the machine for a short time,
then check the oil level in the
hydraulic oil reservoir. Add oil as
necessary.
Hydraulic
Oil
Cooler
117
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
Fault code 34
displayed on the
LCD
Hydraulic temperature fault that sets when
hydraulic oil temperature exceeds 220 F for
15 seconds.
Clean the cooling fins on the
hydraulic oil cooler to ensure
adequate airflow through the cooler.
Fault code 39
displayed on the
LCD
Hydraulic filter fault, sets to warn operator
that oil filter is plugged and needs to be
replaced.
Replace hydraulic oil filter.
Note: Only activates when oil temperature
is above 100 degrees F (this prevents false
signal upon cold engine start up).
General Information Regarding Checking Hydraulic Pressures
Accurate measurements are the key to troubleshooting a hydraulic system. Once you obtain accurate
measurements you can compare them to the specifications to analyze a problem.
You can use digital tachometers, flow gauges or pressure gauges to troubleshoot the hydraulic system.
The pressure gauge should have a range of 0 to 3000 psi (see the Special Tools section) and have a Parker
Diagnostics connector number PD222. The most convenient way to check for oil flow is to check the RPM of
the motor that is performing poorly. Refer to the Specifications tables to determine the motor RPM. If the
motor speed is correct, the pump is producing the correct amount of oil flow. However, this does not mean
that if a motor is running too slow the problem is in the pump.
The following information should be used to check for correct motor RPM, system pressure and relief valve
settings. The readings are nominal figures and there will be variations due to manufacturing tolerances
and system oil temperature. If any reading varies greater than 20 percent, there will be a noticeable loss of
performance and the problem should be corrected.
Test Port Nominal Pressure Readings
Note: See the figure on the following page and the Specifications tables.
100 psi = 6.9 bar.
1. Insert the pressure gauge into the test port.
Note: The Lower Test Port (TP 4) on the Scrub Lift Cylinder is easier to access if you lower the
scrub deck.
2. Run the engine in high throttle position (2200 RPM) and allow the hydraulic oil to warm up.
• The bypass pressure is the pressure reading with no motor or cylinder operating.
• The operational pressure is the pressure range in which the motor or cylinders will operate.
• A much lower than normal bypass pressure could indicate a gear pump problem.
• If the bypass pressure remains the same after turning the function on, there could be a problem in
the control valve or circuit.
118
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
• If the operational pressure is within range but the motor speed is too slow, the problem could be in
the motor.
• If the broom motor operational psi reading is above the bypass psi but is below the operational psi,
check the broom adjustment and wear.
• Check the individual system Troubleshooting sections of this manual for additional information.
TP 3
Scrub Lift Cylinder
Test Ports
TP 1
TP 5
Accessory Pump
Test Ports
TP 2
Upper Test Port (TP 5) on the Scrub Lift Cylinder
TP 4
Lower Test Port (TP 4) on the Scrub Lift Cylinder
TP 5
TP 4
119
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Pressure Tables
Test Port 1
PSI
bar
Accessory Pump 1, engine @ 2200 RPM no
systems running
*120
8.3
Vacuum Fan motor on(recovery tank lid up)
2040
141
Test Port 2
PSI
bar
Accessory Pump 2a non-priority branch, engine @
2200 RPM, no systems running
*370
25.5
Scrub on (Brushes removed)
850
59
Main scrub and RT side scrub motors #3 pressure
1880
Main scrub and dual sweep
1780
Main scrub, RT scrub and LT sweep
1950
Test Port 3
PSI
bar
* 296
20.4
500
34.4
Accessory Pump 2b priority branch, engine @ 2200
RPM no systems running
Steering unit (driving and turning)
* The bypass pressure is the pressure reading with no motor or cylinder operating (flow-through).
Scrub lift
cylinder engine
at 2200 RPM
Test
Port
Pressure
Type
Controlled
by
TP4
Lift
Pressure
Proportioning
Valve S7
Down
Pressure
Proportioning
Relief Valve
S5
TP5
Propulsion Pump Circuits
Pressure
Setting
PSI
bar
1
750 - 774
51.7 - 53.4
2
750 - 767
51.7 - 52.8
3
745 - 779
51.4 - 53.7
1
333 - 346
22.9 - 23.9
2
393 - 412
27.1 - 28.4
3
458 - 499
31.6 - 34.4
Displacement
Cu. In.
GPM
RPM
In
RPM
Out
Hydrostatic pump charge pressure
Hydrostatic pump
Forward drive wheel motor speed test @ 8 mph level
ground, smooth concrete, no accessory systems
running, foot at full speed forward, set 153 RPM @
2400 RPM
Reverse same as above @ 4 mph, set 78 RPM
@2400 RPM
PSI
Relief
PSI
250
1.44
18.3
13.7
2200
[email protected]
2200
FWD RPM
153 [email protected]
F
3500
REV
78
R
2500
2400
RPM
120
Service Manual – SC8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Truth Table
Hydraulic Truth Table
Electrical Solenoid’s Energized Status – Component to Operate
Solenoid Functions
S1
Recovery Tank Fan
X
S5
S6
S7
Scrub Brush Pressure Setting
Regular #1
X
X
X
Scrub Brush Pressure Setting
Heavy #2
X
X
X
Scrub Brush Pressure Setting
Extreme #3
X
X
X
Right Side Scrub Brush Pressure
Settings 1, 2 and 3
X
X
X
Squeegee Down
S2
S3
S4
S8
X
Squeegee Up
X
Scrub Brushes On
X
X
Scrub Brushes Off
Right Scrub On
X
X
Dual Side Broom Sweep On
X
X
Specifications
Component
Specifications
Reservoir capacity
10 gal. [37.8 L]
Fluid type
10W-30 engine oil
Type – manually-variable displacement, axial piston
Displacement – 1.44 CIR
Propulsion (Wheel Drive)
Hydraulic Pump Ratings
S9
Speed – 3600 RPM max.
Continuous pressure – 3000 PSI max.
Relief Setting
Charge Relief – 200-250 PSI
Forward – 3500 PSI
Reverse – 2500 PSI
121
Service Manual – SC8000
Component
Hydraulic System
Specifications
Displacement
Front – 0.58 CID
Rear – 1.20 CID
Speed – 3200 RPM max.
Dual Low-speed
(Accessory) Hydraulic Pump
Ratings
Rated Pressure – 3000 PSI
Max. Pressure – 3500 PSI
Relief Pressure – 1500 PSI on priority flow
Vacuum Water Lift
Sealed @ 2200 RPM: 33.7 in/H2O
SAE (JIC) 37° Flare Fitting Torque Chart
SAE Dash
Thread Size
Torque in
ft-lbs.
FFWR*
-4
7/16” - 20
11
2
-5
1/2” - 20
14
2
-6
9/16” - 18
20
1-1/4
-8
3/4” - 16
43
1
- 10
7/8” - 14
55
1
- 12
1-1/16” - 12
80
1
- 14
1-3/16” - 12
100
1
- 16
1-5/16” - 12
115
1
- 20
1-5/8” - 12
160
1
* FFWR - Flats From Wrench Resistance
122
Service Manual – SC8000
Special Tools
Hydraulic test gauge w/connector, 3000 psi range, p/n 56504516
Hydraulic System
123
Service Manual – SC8000
124
Options and Accessories
Description
Detergent Bottles
Back-up Alarm Kit
The Back-up Alarm Kit includes the
Back-up Alarm Unit, Pigtail Wire
Assembly and mounting hardware.
Warning Beacon Kit
The Warning Beacon Kit mounts
directly on the machine and is
designed for machines without an
overhead guard.
Illustration
Service Manual – SC8000
Description
Overhead Guard Beacon Kit
The Overhead Guard Beacon Kit
mounts onto the overhead guard.
Brake/Signal Light Kit
The Brake/Signal Light Kit includes
amber front signal lights, red
rear stop/signal lights and wiring
harnesses.
Extended Scrub Kit
The Extended Scrub Kit includes the
extended scrub pump, float switch
and strainer, and the electrical and
solution quick-disconnects
Fire Extinguisher Kit
Options and Accessories
Illustration
125
Service Manual – SC8000
Description
Foot Guard Kit
Roller Bumper Kit
Note that the right side roller bumper
is standard on 60” and 67” with right
side scrub.
Wash Hose Kit
(shown mounted behind
Operator seat)
Overhead Guard Kit
(warning beacon sold separately)
Options and Accessories
Illustration
126
Service Manual – SC8000
Description
Overhead Guard Canopy Kit
(overhead guard sold separately)
Rear Bumper Kit
Recovery Tank Clean-out Kit
Recovery Tank Debris Tray Kit
Options and Accessories
Illustration
127
Service Manual – SC8000
Description
Drain Hose Extension
Remote Foot-actuated
Horn Switch Kit
Solution Auto-fill Kit
Right-hand/Dual Armrest Kit
Seat Belt Kit for Standard Seat
Options and Accessories
Illustration
128
Service Manual – SC8000
Description
Deluxe Suspension Seat Kit
(includes right-hand armrest
and seat belt)
Under Hood Light Kit
(includes trouble light with magnetic
base on an extendable cable)
Vacuum Wand Kit
(shown mounted on machine)
Options and Accessories
Illustration
129
Service Manual – SC8000
130
Recovery System
Functional Description
System Overview
The recovery system picks up the scrubbing solution from the floor and directs it to the recovery tank. The
vacuum fan, powered by an auxiliary hydraulic motor driven by the engine, draws air from the recovery tank
to create a vacuum in the tank and at the squeegee to pick up the solution. The solution travels through the
squeegee hose and into the recovery tank.
The vacuum fan motor switches on automatically when the scrub system is enabled and the machine moves
forward. The motor will switch off after a predetermined time delay once machine motion stops.
The vacuum fan motor can also be switched on independent of the scrub system by pressing the vacuum
switch (old style control panel) or the vacuum/wand switch (new style control panel). This is used to pick up
solution already on the floor, or when using a wand on the squeegee hose.
Refer to the Squeegee System section for more information on the squeegee components and operation.
Recovery System Wiring Diagram
K1
87
Relay, Power
CB5
Battery
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 10A
2
B
3
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
Driver Box
L1
1
2
Vacuum Fan S1
J2-8
Bat -
J1-10
J1-31
R1
1
J1-11
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
B+
2
J1-27
J1-5
2
1
Switch, Seat
S2
1
Switch, Recovery Full
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Service Manual – SC8000
Recovery System
Electrical Circuit Description
The Vacuum Fan Solenoid Valve S1 controls the hydraulic oil flow to the fan motor. Note that S1 is not a
proportional valve and is either on or off. The following conditions must be met for S1 to energize and allow
hydraulic oil to flow to the vacuum fan motor:
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has
actuated the recovery system.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
• The Recovery Full Switch S2 must be closed (recovery tank not full).
Recovery System Hydraulic Diagram
An electric solenoid, S1, controls the hydraulic Vac Fan Control Valve (L1) which controls the hydraulic oil flow
to the vacuum fan motor.
Vacuum Fan Off
Solenoid
Off
Vacuum Fan
In the normally-off condition, the S1
Vacuum Fan Control Valve is de-energized
(Solenoid Off). This allows the hydraulic
oil to flow from the Aux. (auxiliary) Pump
through S1 to the Filter and Propulsion
Pump Charge Port, bypassing the Vacuum
Fan motor.
S1 Vac Fan Control Valve
Pressure Relief
Valve
Aux. Pump
Reservoir
Return through
Filter to
Propulsion Pump
Charge Port
131
Service Manual – SC8000
Vacuum Fan On
Recovery System
Solenoid
On
Vacuum Fan
When the vacuum fan is switched on, the
S1 Vacuum Fan Control Valve is energized
(Solenoid On) to direct the hydraulic
oil flow from the Aux. (auxiliary) Pump
through the Vacuum Fan motor, then to the
Reservoir.
The Pressure Relief Valve will open to allow
the oil to flow back into the Propulsion
Pump Charge Port if a high-pressure
condition occurs in the hydraulic lines
before the oil enters the tank, (stalled
motor, plugged hose, etc.).
S1 Vac Fan Control Valve
Pressure Relief
Valve
Aux. Pump
Reservoir
Return through
Filter to
Propulsion Pump
Charge Port
132
Service Manual – SC8000
Recovery System
Component Locations
Recovery Tank
The Recovery Tank is on
the left rear side of the
machine.
The Vacuum Fan Assembly,
driven by a hydraulic
motor, is located on the
right side of the machine.
The Vacuum Fan Assembly
pulls air through the
Vacuum Hose which is
connected to the Recovery
Tank. The airflow creates
the vacuum needed to pull
the wastewater from the
squeegee and Squeegee
Hose Assembly, through
the Cuffed Hose Assembly
and into the Recovery Tank.
The Recovery Tank Cover
Assembly opens to allow
access to the inside of the
Recovery Tank, and to the
Vacuum Fan Assembly and
hoses. The Recovery Tank
Cover Assembly seals on
the Recovery Tank when
closed to maintain the
vacuum inside of the
Recovery Tank.
The Drain Hose allows you
to empty the Recovery
Tank.
Cuffed Hose
Assembly
Vacuum Fan
Assembly
Recovery
Tank
Cover
Assembly
Vacuum
Hose
Recovery
Tank
Squeegee
Hose
Assembly
Drain
Hose
133
Service Manual – SC8000
Recovery System
Daily Maintenance
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance, make sure the key switch is off, the key
is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
• Check the gasket on the recovery tank cover for damage/wear.
• Check that the drain hose cap is sealed.
• Drain the recovery tank, then clean the inside of the tank by flushing with clean water.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
Poor water pickup
Vacuum leak(s) due to:
• Check the drain hose cap and tighten/replace as
necessary.
• Leaky drain hose cap
• Leaky hose(s)
• Bad gasket
• Damaged tank
• Check the squeegee and recovery tank hoses and
tighten/replace as necessary.
• Check the vacuum hose and clamps between the
vacuum fan assembly and the recovery tank and
tighten/replace as necessary.
• Check the gaskets and replace as necessary.
• Check the recovery tank for damage.
Restrictions due to built-up
debris in the squeegee tool,
vacuum hoses or float cage
1. Check the squeegee tool, vacuum hoses and float
cage for any accumulated dirt or debris and clean
as necessary.
2. Check the vacuum system airflow pathway
wherever the airflow is forced to make a sharp
turn for any accumulated dirt or debris and clean
as necessary.
Vacuum fan motor
not working
Squeegee out of adjustment
Readjust the squeegee as necessary (refer to the
Squeegee Adjustment section in the Instructions For
Use).
Vacuum fan solenoid over
current (fault code 09
displayed)
• Check L1 the solenoid coil wiring for problems
(+ GRN/BRN and - BRN/YEL).
• Check the solenoid coil resistance. If less than
6 ohms, replace the solenoid. Also see the
Recovery System Wiring Diagram.
134
Service Manual – SC8000
Recovery System
Removal and Installation
Warning! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch
is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Recovery Tank
Caution: The recovery tank is relatively heavy. It’s recommended that the recovery tank be
removed by two or more persons to prevent possible personal injury or damage to the
recovery tank.
1. Drain the recovery tank.
Note: If your machine is equipped with an extended scrub system, you must disconnect the Float
Switch Quick-disconnect and Solution Quick-disconnect Coupler before you can remove
the recovery tank. (Refer to the Solution System/Functional Description/Extended Scrub
System subsection.)
2. Press the Skirt Latch and swing the
left-hand Side Skirt Assembly out of the
way.
Skirt
Latch
3. Lift and prop open the recovery tank
cover assembly.
Side Skirt
Assembly
4. Press the Recovery Tank Latch and carefully tip the
recovery tank out away from the machine.
Recovery
Tank Latch
135
Service Manual – SC8000
Recovery System
5. Unhook the Cable Assembly from the Recovery
Tank, then carefully swing the Recovery Tank
down and lift it off of the machine.
Recovery
Tank
Cable
Assembly
Note: When you reinstall the Recovery Tank, set the Tank onto the two Mounting Pins on the frame,
then tilt the Tank up and reattach the Cable Assembly.
Front
Mounting Pin
Rear
Mounting Pin
136
Service Manual – SC8000
Recovery System
Specifications
Component
Specifications
Shaft Rotation – Clockwise (as viewed from shaft end)
Pressure Ratings:
Fan Assembly Motor
• 3000 PSI – Continuous
• 4000 PSI –Intermittent
Displacement – 0.129 CIR
Vacuum Water Lift (Sealed)
Vacuum Fan Solenoid Valve
L1
33.7 inches H2O @ 2200 RPM
Current – 1.5 Amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Special Tools
Vacuum water lift gauge, p/n 56205281
137
Service Manual – SC8000
138
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Functional Description
Overview
The cylindrical scrub system includes the main scrub deck and hopper, the two hydraulic brush motors,
the hydraulic lift cylinder that lowers and raises the deck, and the associated hydraulic solenoid valves.
The dual-displacement, low-speed (accessory) pump (1.20 CID) powers the two scrub brush motors and the
hydraulic scrub lift cylinder.
The scrub lift cylinder is controlled by two proportioning hydraulic solenoid valves that work together, on
opposite ends of the lift cylinder, to produce the desired main scrub deck pressure.
Cylindrical Scrub System Wiring Diagram
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
Battery
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
2
B
3
K1
Driver Box
2
J2-7
B1
J2-1
Relay, Power
J1-12
1
S1
Switch, Ignition
Ignition_KeyPos
J6-1 (B+)
Bat -
Scrub Brush S4
L7
1
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
2
J2-24
Scrub Pressure Proportional Up (S7)
L5
1
2
J2-26
Scrub Pressure Proportional Down (S5)
L6
1
2
J2-4
Bat - (PWM)
Twisted Pair
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
Bat - (PWM)
J1-10
J1-31
Bat -
J1-11
Scrub Cylinder Lock (S6)
R1
1
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
J1-18
Circuit Description
For the scrub system to work, the key switch must be on, the engine must be running and the Driver Box
must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has actuated the scrub
system.
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Scrub Brush Motors
For the scrub brush motors to run:
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
• The Driver Box must provide a ground at pin J2-7 to energize the Scrub Brush solenoid valve S4 which
directs the hydraulic fluid to flow through the scrub brush motors.
Scrub Lift Cylinder
For the scrub lift cylinder to actuate the scrub deck:
• The Scrub Cylinder Lock solenoid valve S6 must open to allow oil to flow to and from the Scrub Lift Cylinder.
• The Driver Box must provide the appropriate ground signal from pin J2-26 to the Scrub Pressure
Proportional Down valve S5, and the appropriate ground signal from pin J2-24 to the Scrub Pressure
Proportional Up valve S7 to provide the down scrub pressure selected by the Operator.
Note that the Driver Box ground signals to S5 and S7 are pulse width modulated (PWM) signals which
open the valves proportionally to produce the appropriate hydraulic pressures on both the piston and rod
ends of the Scrub Lift Cylinder. This combination of up and down forces on the lift cylinder, combined with
the weight of the cylindrical scrub deck, applies the correct amount of downward force on the scrub deck
to produce the desired scrub pressure.
Also note that the signals to the S5 and S7 valves allow the valves to “dither” (oscillate in a slight backand-forth motion at high frequency) to prevent the valves from sticking.
139
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Cylindrical Scrub System Hydraulic Diagrams
Scrub Motors Off
When the scrub motors are off, the
Accessory Pump (1.20 CID) sends
oil to the Priority Flow Divider which
directs the oil to the open Scrub
Brush Valve L4. The oil travels
through the Scrub Brush Valve L4,
through the Oil Cooler and Filter.
The oil then travels to the Charge
Circuit and to the Main Piston
(propulsion) Pump, where it goes
through the case and returns to
the Reservoir.
Scrub Brush
Motors
Oil
Cooler
Scrub Brush
Valve L4
Filter
Relief
Valve R2
Priority
Flow Divider
Main Piston
(Propulsion)
Pump
Accessory
Pump
Charge Circuit
Reservoir
Scrub Motors On
When the scrub motors are on, the
Accessory Pump (1.20 CID) sends
oil to the Priority Flow Divider which
directs the oil to the energized
(closed) Scrub Brush Valve L4. The
oil is directed past the Scrub Brush
Valve L4 and through the two
Scrub Brush Motors, causing them
to rotate The oil travels from the
Scrub Brush Motors through the
Oil Cooler and Filter, then to the
Charge Circuit for the Main Piston
(propulsion) Pump.
Scrub Brush
Motors
Oil
Cooler
Scrub Brush
Valve L4
Filter
Relief
Valve R2
Priority Flow
Divider
Main Piston
(Propulsion)
Pump
Charge Circuit
Accessory
Pump
140
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Scrub Lift Cylinder with
Engine Shut Off
When the engine is shut
off, the de-energized Scrub
Cylinder Lock L6 valve
holds the oil pressure
from the bottom port on
the Scrub Lift Cylinder to
support the Weight of The
Scrub Deck and prevent it
from “floating down”.
Scrub Lift
Cylinder
Scrub
Cylinder
Lock L6
Weight of
Scrub Deck
Scrub Lift Cylinder Off
with Engine Running
When the engine is running
but the scrub system is off, the
Accessory Pump pumps the oil
through the Steering Unit and to
the Scrub Brush Proportional Up L7
valve, the Scrub Brush Proportional
Down L5 valve and the Scrub
Cylinder Lock L6 valve.
• The Brush Proportional Up L7
valve provides adequate oil
pressure to the bottom port on
the Scrub Lift Cylinder, through
the Scrub Cylinder Lock L6 valve,
to raise the scrub deck.
• The de-energized Scrub Brush
Proportional Down L5 valve
closes off the oil flow to the top
port on the Scrub Lift Cylinder.
Any oil from the top port on the
Scrub Lift Cylinder is directed to
the Reservoir.
Scrub Lift
Cylinder
Scrub
Cylinder
Lock L6
Scrub Brush
Proportional
Down L5
Scrub Brush
Proportional
Up L7
Steering
Unit
Accessory
Pump
Reservoir
• The de-energized Scrub Cylinder Lock L6 valve holds the oil pressure from the bottom port on the Scrub Lift
Cylinder to keep the scrub deck in its raised position.
141
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Scrub Lift Cylinder On
with Engine Running
When the engine is running and
the scrub system is switched on, the
Accessory Pump pumps the oil through
the Steering Unit and to the Scrub Brush
Proportional Up L7 valve, the Scrub
Brush Proportional Down L5 valve and
the Scrub Cylinder Lock L6 valve.
• The energized Scrub Brush
Proportional Up L7 valve provides
oil pressure ranging from
approximately 750 to 779 psi
(depending on the scrub pressure
selected) to the bottom port on the
Scrub Lift Cylinder.
• The energized Scrub Brush
Proportional Down L5 valve
provides oil pressure ranging
from approximately 333 to 499 psi
(depending on the scrub pressure
selected) to the top port on the
Scrub Lift Cylinder.
Scrub Lift
Cylinder
Scrub
Cylinder
Lock L6
Scrub Brush
Proportional
Down L5
Scrub Brush
Proportional
Up L7
Steering
Unit
Accessory
Pump
Reservoir
• The energized Scrub Cylinder
Lock L6 valve opens to allow
bidirectional oil flow through the
valve.
Note: The pressure differential between what the Scrub Brush Proportional Up L7 valve and the
Scrub Brush Proportional Down L5 valve send to the Scrub Lift Cylinder, and the weight of the
scrub deck all work in conjunction to produce the three scrub pressures.
142
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Component Locations
The Brush Housing
Weldment houses
the scrub brushes,
Left Skirt
Assembly
Drive Motor
Assemblies and
the brush drive
components.
The Scrub Lift
HubBroom
Driver
Cylinder Assembly
raises and lowers
the scrub deck.
Scrub Lift
Cylinder
Assembly
Brush
Housing
Weldment
The Left and Right
Skirt Assemblies
are mounted on
the outside of the
Brush Housing
Weldment.
The removable
Hopper collects
any dirt or debris
picked up by the
scrub brushes.
The Screen
Weldment sits in
the Hopper, and
is connected to
a vacuum hose
that removes
any accumulated
water from the
Hopper. The Screen
Weldment can be
removed from
the Hopper for
cleaning.
Drive
Motor
Assembly
Idler
Assembly
Screen
Weldment
Right Skirt
Assembly
Drive
Motor
Assembly
Hopper
143
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Maintenance
Scrub Deck Leveling Adjustment
As the scrub deck is raised and lowered, it uses parallelogram linkage to maintain level with respect to the
floor. Signs of misadjustment include uneven wear between the front and rear brushes, but can also include
uneven wear side-to-side if the right- and left-hand parallelogram links do not match one another, resulting
in a skewed or twisted scrub deck.
1. Move the machine to an area with a smooth and
level floor.
Skirt
Latch
2. With the scrub deck raised, open the side skirts
and remove both brushes.
3. Inspect the 4 scrub deck plastic skids, and
replace them if worn. Replace them before
continuing with the rest of this procedure.
Side
Skirt
4. Loosen both the right and left adjustment screws
from the front of the parallelogram link brackets.
5. Lower the scrub deck to the floor, and make sure that all 4 deck skids are resting on the floor.
6. Retighten the two adjustment screws.
Parallelogram
Links
Link
Bracket
Adjustment
Screw
144
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The scrub deck
will not extend
downward, the
scrub brush
motors will not
operate and there
is no solution flow.
Scrub brush pressure
valve solenoids over
current (fault code 01
displayed)
• Check L5 down and L7 up pressure valve solenoid coils
(on same fault line) for wiring problems, L5 wire colors
(+ ORN and - WHT/VIO) and L7 ( + ORN and ORN/
RED).
Note that a fault
code 01, 13 or 15
will disable the
scrub system.
Scrub brush motor
solenoid over current
(fault code 13 displayed)
• Check L4 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and
- ORN/BLU).
Scrub cylinder lock
solenoid over current
(fault code 15 displayed)
• Check L6 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN and
- YEL/BLU).
The scrub deck
pressures are set
incorrectly in the User
Options Menu.
Reprogram the scrub deck pressures as required. (Refer
to the Control System/Control Board (Driver Box)
Programming Options/User Options Menu subsection.)
Problem in the electrical
control circuit
• Check the coil resistance on both L5 and L7 solenoids
(spec. 2.2 ohms).
Scrub deck
pressures will
not change;
inoperative in its
three settings
• Check coil resistance. If less than 1.8 ohms, replace.
Also see main scrub on and right scrub brushes deck
pressure electrical ladder detail and further specs.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace. Also
see main scrub on and side sweep/right scrub electrical
ladder detail.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace.
Also see main scrub on and right scrub brushes deck
pressure electrical ladder detail.
• Check solenoid wiring continuity from Driver Box for
both L5 and L7.
• Check the current draw on both solenoids using an amp
clamp (spec. 2.1 amps).
• Substitute a new Driver Box if the solenoid coils and
wiring check out OK, but no current is found when
activating scrub deck pressure circuit function.
• If the electrical control circuits test OK, check for
possible Hydraulic load circuit problems.
Problem in the hydraulic
load circuit
• Inspect for binding and any possible mechanical
damage to the deck lift cylinder and deck lift linkage.
• Remove the S5 and S7 scrub lift cylinder valve
cartridges from the manifold. Inspect, clean and operate
the cartridges outside of the manifold. If the cartridges
function OK, reinstall. If not, replace as necessary.
• Connect a hydraulic pressure gauge at the test ports
TP4 and TP5 and check the system operating pressures
(See the table below for specifications.)
• If the deck pressures still do not function correctly after
replacing the valve cartridge(s), replace the scrub lift
cylinder.
145
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Test
Port
Pressure
Type
Controlled
by
TP4
Lift
Pressure
Proportioning
Valve S7
Down
Pressure
Proportioning
Relief Valve
S5
Scrub lift cylinder 1.50 x 5.00,
engine at 2200 RPM
TP5
Average Lift Pressure Differential
(Lift Pressure minus Down Pressure)
Pressure
Setting
PSI
1
750 - 774
2
750 - 767
3
745 - 779
1
333 - 346
2
393 - 412
3
458 - 499
Pressure
Setting 1
Pressure
Setting 2
Pressure
Setting 3
423 psi
353 psi
283 psi
Note: The actual scrub pressure is determined by the differential lift pressure lifting the scrub deck
upward against the downward force of the scrub deck weight. The lower the differential lift
pressure, the higher the scrub pressure.
146
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Main Scrub Deck and Right Side Scrub Down
The following conditions must be met for the Main Scrub Deck to move to the scrub (down) position:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub on mode must be selected on the Dashboard Panel.
CB4
RED/VIO
ORN
20A
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
(12V DC)
S1
KEY SWITCH
B1
12VDC
L5
WHT/VIO
MAIN SCRUB LIFT
CYLINDER DOWN
12VDC
L6
B-
DRIVER BOX
YEL/BLU
SCRUB CYLINDER
LOCK
PIN J2-26
B- OUTPUT
PIN J2-4
B- OUTPUT
B+
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
0V
L9
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L5
2.1 Amps
2.2 ohms
L6
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
L9
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
147
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Main Scrub Deck and Right Side Scrub Pressure
The following conditions must be met for the Main Scrub Deck to apply the selected downward scrub
pressure:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
MAIN &on
RIGHT
SIDE SCRUBPanel
BRUSH(ES)
• The scrub on mode must be selected
the Dashboard
.
DECK PRESSURE
• The drive pedal must be activated (moved from the neutral position).
CB4
RED/VIO
ORN
20A
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
S1
KEY SWITCH
B1
L5
WHT/VIO
SCRUB PRESSURE
PROPORTIONAL DN
12VDC
L6
B-
DRIVER BOX
Variable 12VDC PWM
YEL/BLU
SCRUB CYLINDER
LOCK
PIN J2-26
B- OUTPUT
PWM*
B+
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
PIN J2-4
B- OUTPUT
Variable 12VDC PWM
L7
ORN/RED
SCRUB PRESSURE
PROPORTIONAL UP
PIN J2-24
B- OUTPUT
PWM*
* PWM = Pulse Width Modulated
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L5
2.1 Amps
2.2 ohms
L6
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
L7
2.1 Amps
2.2 ohms
Pressure Setting
L5 Coil Amp draw readings (± 10%)
1
1.38 - 1.75 amps
(varies with scrub setting selected)
2
3
Pressure Setting
L7 Coil Amp draw readings (± 10%)
1
1.45 to 1.75 amps
(all three scrub pressure settings)
2
3
148
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Main Scrub and Side Sweep/Scrub On
The following conditions must be met for the Main Scrub Deck motors to run:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub on mode must be selected on the Dashboard Panel.
• The drive pedal must be activated (moved from the neutral position).
CB4
ORN
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
20A
S1
KEY SWITCH
B1
BDRIVER BOX
12VDC
L4
ORN/BLU
B- OUTPUT
MAIN SCRUB
BRUSH
12VDC
L8
B+
PIN J2-7
BLK/WHT
SIDE SWEEP/
RIGHT SCRUB
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
PIN J2-2
B- OUTPUT
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L4
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
L8
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
149
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Cylindrical
Specifications
General Specifications
Component
Specifications
Scrub Brush Solenoid Valve
L4
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Current – 2.1 amps
Scrub Pressure Proportional
Down Solenoid Valve L5
Nominal Coil Resistance – 2.2 ohms
Voltage Range (PWM) – 0-12 V
Current – 1.5 amps
Scrub Cylinder Lock
Solenoid Valve L6
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Current – 2.1 amps
Scrub Pressure Proportional
Up Solenoid Valve L7
Nominal Coil Resistance – 2.2 ohms
Voltage Range (PWM) – 0-12 V
Main Broom Motors
Displacement – 4.5 CIR
Scrub Pressures
Proportioning
Valve
Pressure
Type
S7
Scrub
Pressure
Up
Proportioning
Valve
Pressure
Type
S5
Scrub
Pressure
Down
Scrub
Pressure
Setting
Hydraulic
Pressure at Test
Port TP4
1
750 to 774 psi
2
750 to 767 psi
3
745 to 779 psi
Scrub
Pressure
Setting
Hydraulic
Pressure at Test
Port TP5
1
333 to 346 psi
2
393 to 412 psi
3
458 to 499 psi
Valve Solenoid Coil
Current Draw
1.45 to 1.75 amps
(all three scrub
pressure settings)
Valve Solenoid Coil
Current Draw
1.38 - 1.75 amps
(varies with scrub
setting selected)
150
Service Manual – SC8000
Special Tools
Hydraulic test gauge w/connector, 3000 psi range, p/n 56504516
Scrub System, Cylindrical
151
Service Manual – SC8000
152
Scrub System, Right Side
Functional Description
Overview
The right side scrub system (optional on some models) includes the right brush assembly, right brush
hydraulic motor, the hydraulic scrub cylinder that lowers and raises the right scrub assembly, and the
associated hydraulic solenoid valves.
The right scrub lift cylinder is powered by the same hydraulic lines that actuate the main scrub lift cylinder,
and is controlled by a separate side scrub lift solenoid valve S9.
The right brush hydraulic motor is powered by the hydraulic discharge line from the two main scrub brush
motors and is controlled by a separate side/sweep scrub solenoid valve S8.
Right Side Scrub System Wiring Diagram
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
Battery
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
2
B
3
K1
Driver Box
1
2
B1
J2-1
Relay, Power
J1-12
J2-7
S1
Switch, Ignition
Ignition_KeyPos
J6-1 (B+)
Bat -
Scrub Brush S4
L7
1
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
2
J2-24
Scrub Pressure Proportional Up (S7)
L5
1
2
J2-26
Scrub Pressure Proportional Down (S5)
L6
1
2
J2-4
Bat - (PWM)
Twisted Pair
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
Bat - (PWM)
J1-10
J1-31
Scrub Cylinder Lock (S6)
L9
1
2
J2-3
Side Scrub Lift (S9)
L8
1
2
J2-2
Bat -
J1-11
R1
1
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
Bat J1-18
Bat -
Side Sweep/Scrub (S8)
Circuit Description
For the right side scrub system to work, the key switch must be on, the engine must be running and the
Driver Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has actuated
the main and right side scrub systems.
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Right Side Scrub Brush Motor
For the right side scrub brush motor to run:
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
• The main scrub brush motors must be running to supply oil to right side scrub motor.
• The Driver Box must provide a ground from pin J2-2 to the Side Sweep/Scrub solenoid valve S8 to open the
valve and allow oil to flow to the right side scrub motor.
Right Side Scrub Lift Cylinder
For the right side scrub lift cylinder to actuate the scrub brush:
• The Scrub Cylinder Lock solenoid valve S6 must be open to allow oil to flow to and from the scrub lift
cylinder.
• The Driver Box must provide the appropriate ground signal from pin J2-26 to the Scrub Pressure
Proportional Down valve S5, and the appropriate ground signal from pin J2-24 to the Scrub Pressure
Proportional Up valve S7 to extend the right side scrub lift cylinder and lower the right side scrub brush.
• Once the right side scrub brush is retracted upward after scrubbing, the Side Scrub Lift solenoid valve
S9 closes to shut off the oil flow to the right side scrub lift cylinder to ensure that the brush remains
retracted.
Right Side Scrub System Hydraulic Diagrams
Side Scrub Motor Off
When the Right Side Scrub Motor is off, the Side Sweep/Scrub Valve
L8 is de-energized. The Side Sweep/Scrub Valve L8 directs the oil to
the oil cooler and filter, bypassing the Right Side Scrub Motor.
From Cylindrical
Scrub Brush Motors
Right Side
Scrub Motor
Side
Sweep/Scrub
Valve L8
To Oil Cooler
153
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Side Scrub Motor On
When the Right Side Scrub Motor is on, the Side Sweep/Scrub Valve
L8 is energized to direct the oil from the Cylindrical Scrub Brush
Motors through the Right Side Scrub Motor. The oil then travels
from the discharge side of the Right Side Scrub Motor to the oil
cooler and filter.
From Cylindrical
Scrub Brush Motors
Right Side
Scrub Motor
Side
Sweep/Scrub
Valve L8
ToCooler
Oil Cooler
To Oil
Side Scrub Lift Cylinder Off (Retracted)
When the engine is running and the
main scrub system or right side scrub
brush is switched off, the Side Scrub
Lift Valve L9 is energized to direct the
oil from the Lower Chamber on the
Scrub Deck Lift Cylinder (D) to the lower
chamber on the Side Scrub Lift Cylinder
to raise the right side scrub brush. The
Side Scrub Lift Valve L9 directs the oil
from the upper chamber on the Side
Scrub Lift Cylinder (E) to the oil reservoir.
To Reservoir
E
From Upper
Chamber on Scrub
Deck Lift Cylinder
C
From Lower
Chamber on Scrub
Deck Lift Cylinder
D
Side Scrub
Lift Valve L9
Side Scrub
Lift Cylinder
When the engine is switched off, the de-energized Scrub Cylinder Lock L6 Valve holds the oil pressure from
the bottom chambers on both the Side Scrub Lift Cylinder and Scrub Lift Cylinder to keep the right side scrub
brush and cylindrical scrub deck in the raised position.
154
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Side Scrub Lift Cylinder On
When the engine is running and the
main scrub system and right side scrub
brush are switched on, the Side Scrub
Lift Valve L9 is de-energized to direct the
oil from the Upper Chamber on the Scrub
Deck Lift Cylinder (C) to extend the Side
Scrub Lift Cylinder and lower the right
side scrub brush.
To Reservoir
E
From Upper
Chamber on Scrub
Deck Lift Cylinder
C
From Lower
Chamber on Scrub
Deck Lift Cylinder
D
Side Scrub
Lift Valve L9
Side Scrub
Lift Cylinder
Component Locations
The Right Scrub Assembly
is mounted to the Bumper
Weldment via a linkage
assembly.
The Right Side Scrub Lift
Cylinder extends and retracts
the Right Scrub Assembly
in conjunction with the
cylindrical scrub deck.
Bumper
Weldment
The Right Side Scrub Motor is
plumbed into the hydraulic
lines for the cylindrical deck
brush motors and switches on
and off with the cylindrical
deck motors.
The Right Solution Solenoid
Valve (L11) controls the
solution flow to the Right Scrub
Assembly.
Right Side
Scrub Lift
Cylinder
Right Side
Scrub Motor
Right Scrub
Assembly
Right Solution
Solenoid Valve
155
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
The Right Side Scrub/Sweep Solenoid Valve
S8/L8 controls the right side scrub motor.
S8/L8 is located above the front end of the
Scrub Deck.
Scrub
Deck
S8/L8
The Right Side Scrub Lift Cylinder Solenoid
Valve S9/L9 controls the side scrub lift
cylinder. S9/L9 is located inboard of the
Right Scrub Assembly.
S9/L9
Right Scrub
Assembly
156
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key
switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Side Brush Tilt Adjustment
1. Disconnect one of the two Rod Ends from its Mounting
Tab.
2. Loosen the Jam Nut.
Rod End
3. Rotate either Rod End to lengthen or shorten the Rod
End Assembly as necessary to get the correct brush
angle to the floor.
Note: The nominal factory dimension between
the Rod End stud centers is 7.5” ±.06”
[190.5 mm ±1.5 mm].
Rod End
Assembly
Mounting
Tab
Jam Nut
4. Make sure the threaded stud on the Rod End will
align with the matching hole in the Mounting Tab,
then tighten the Jam Nut.
Rod
End
5. Reinstall the Rod End into the Mounting Tab.
6. Run the brush up and down to check for correct brush
angle with the floor.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 5 above as necessary.
Mounting
Tab
157
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The side scrub
brush will not extend
downward, the side
scrub brush motor
will not operate and
there is no solution
flow.
Right Scrub System not
installed
Make sure the side scrub system is installed in the
Configuration Menu. (Refer to the Control System/
Control Board (Driver Box) Programming
Options/Configuration Menu subsection.)
Right side scrub solution
solenoid valve over current
(fault code 08 displayed)
• Check L11 solenoid coil wiring for problems
(+ ORN and - BLU/YEL).
Right side scrub/sweep
motor solenoid valve over
current (fault code 16
displayed)
• Check L8 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN
and - BLK/WHT).
Right Side scrub lift solenoid
over current (fault code 18
displayed)
• Check L9 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN
and - GRN/VIO).
Note that a fault
code 08, 16 or 18
will disable the side
scrub system.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 10 ohms,
replace. Also see main scrub and right side scrub
solution valves and pump electrical ladder detail.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace.
Also see main scrub on and side sweep/right
scrub electrical ladder detail.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace.
Also see main scrub and right side scrub lift
electrical ladder detail.
158
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Main Scrub Deck and Right Side Scrub Down
The following conditions must be met for the Right Side Scrub Brush to move to the scrub (down) position:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub on mode and side broom/scrub must be selected on the Dashboard Panel.
CB4
RED/VIO
ORN
20A
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
(12V DC)
S1
KEY SWITCH
B1
12VDC
L5
WHT/VIO
MAIN SCRUB LIFT
CYLINDER DOWN
12VDC
L6
B-
DRIVER BOX
YEL/BLU
SCRUB CYLINDER
LOCK
PIN J2-26
B- OUTPUT
PIN J2-4
B- OUTPUT
B+
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
0V
L9
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L5
2.1 Amps
2.2 ohms
L6
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
L9
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
159
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Main Scrub and Side Sweep/Scrub On
The following conditions must be met for the Right Side Scrub Brush motor to run:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub on mode and side broom/scrub must be selected on the Dashboard Panel.
• The drive pedal must be activated (moved from the neutral position).
CB4
ORN
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
20A
S1
KEY SWITCH
B1
BDRIVER BOX
12VDC
L4
ORN/BLU
B- OUTPUT
MAIN SCRUB
BRUSH
12VDC
L8
B+
PIN J2-7
BLK/WHT
SIDE SWEEP/
RIGHT SCRUB
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
PIN J2-2
B- OUTPUT
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L4
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
L8
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
160
Service Manual – SC8000
Scrub System, Right Side
Specifications
Component
Scrub Brush Solenoid Valve
L4
Side Sweep/Scrub Solenoid
Valve L8
Side Scrub Lift Solenoid
Valve L9
Specifications
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Displacement – 11.3 CIR
Right Side Scrub Motor
Rotation - Clockwise (as viewed from shaft end)
Pressure Port - A
Special Tools
Hydraulic test gauge w/connector, 3000 psi range, p/n 56504516
161
Service Manual – SC8000
162
Solution System
Functional Description
Overview
The solution system
delivers water, or
detergent and water, to
the floor for the scrub
system. The standard
solution system includes
the Solution Tank, solutionempty switch, Solution
Shutoff Valve, Solution Filter,
Solution Pump (M4), Main
Solution Solenoid Valve
(L10), and the associated
plumbing to distribute
solution to the Scrub
Brushes. A capped Solution
Drain Hose allows you to
drain the solution tank.
Solution
Pump
Solution
Tank
Main
Solution
Solenoid
Valve
Solution
Filter
Scrub
Brushes
The solution flows to the
Scrub Brushes any time the
scrub system is enabled,
the scrub deck is lowered
and the drive pedal is not
in the neutral position.
Programming options
allow you to enable or
disable solution flow when
the machine moves in
reverse.
Solution
Shutoff Valve
Solution
Drain Hose
When the scrub system is disabled, no solution will flow to the Scrub Brushes regardless of drive pedal or
scrub deck position. The operator can enable the solution system independent of the scrub system to pre-wet
the floor before enabling the scrub and/or recovery systems.
The solution system also provides solution to the following optional equipment if the machine is so equipped:
• Right side scrub brush,
• DustGuard™ system spray nozzles,
• Wash hose.
Solution Flow Control
The electric solution pump and main solution solenoid valve control the solution flow to the main scrub
brushes. The main solution solenoid valve opens when the solution system switches on. A Pulsed Width
Modulated (PWM) output from J3-2 on the Drive Box controls the speed of the solution pump to regulate
solution flow to the brushes.
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Detergent System
The AXP™/EDS and
EcoFlex™ detergent
systems use dual
diaphragm Detergent
Pumps (M10 and M11) to
pump detergent into the
solution flow upstream of
the Main Solution Solenoid
Valve (L10). Two Detergent
Pumps are used to ensure
adequate detergent supply
at the higher detergent
and solution flow rates.
The Driver Box sends
voltage to the Detergent
Pumps that changes
polarity and dwell time
to regulate the detergent
dispense rate according to
the solution flow rate.
The Detergent Supply
Line from the Detergent
Cartridge is split into two
lines, one feeding each
Detergent Pump. The two
lines from the Detergent
Pumps merge into one
Detergent Supply Line,
which is then connected to
the Solution Hose upstream
of the Main Solution
Solenoid Valve.
Main
Solution
Solenoid
Valve
Tee (1)
Tee (2)
Solution
Hose
Detergent
Cartridge (2)
Detergent
Supply
Line (to
Pumps)
Detergent
Pumps
Detergent
Supply
Line (to
Solution
Hose)
The Tee (1) by the Main Solution Solenoid Valve provides solution to the right front scrub brush (if the machine
is so equipped).
The Tee (2) upstream of the Detergent Supply Line provides solution from the recovery tank for the extended
scrub system (if the machine is so equipped).
163
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Extended Scrub System
Machines equipped with
the optional extended
scrub system will pump
the recovered water
from the Recovery Tank
to the scrub brushes.
The extended scrub
system uses an additional
Extended Scrub Pump (M6)
to pump the recovered
water to the scrub brushes.
Note that the extended
scrub system can be
configured to operate only
when the solution tank is
empty (USE CLEAN FIRST
mode), or whenever the
system is enabled, there
is enough recovered water
available in the recovery
tank and the Extended
Scrub (Float) Switch (S7) is
open (USE ANYTIME mode).
Float
Switch
Quickdisconnect
Solution
Tank
Solution
Pump
Tee (1)
Solution
Quickdisconnect
Coupler
Recovery
Tank
Tee (2)
Scrub
Brushes
Extended
Scrub
Pump
Extended
Scrub
(Float)
Switch
In order for the extended
scrub system to work:
• The extended scrub system must be installed and enabled, and,
• The Extended Scrub (Float) Switch (S7) must not be actuated (open), indicating adequate water level in the
recovery tank.
• If the extended scrub system is configured to the USE CLEAN FIRST mode, the solution tank empty switch
(S3) must be actuated (closed), indicating that the solution tank is empty.
If the extended scrub system is configured to the USE ANYTIME mode, the solution tank empty switch (S3)
will have no effect.
Note that when the machine is in the extended scrub mode, the Solution Pump will switch off, the Extended
Scrub Pump will switch on and the detergent pumps will continue to add detergent to the recovered water.
The Float Switch Quick-disconnect and Solution Quick-disconnect Coupler allow you to disconnect the water line
and Extended Scrub (Float) Switch electrical connector when removing the Recovery Tank.
The Tee (1) closer to the Scrub Brushes provides solution to the right front scrub brush (if the machine is so
equipped).
The Tee (2) farther from the Scrub Brushes delivers detergent to the solution (if the machine is equipped with
a detergent system).
Note that on machines not equipped with AXP™/EDS or EcoFlex™, the operator must manually mix the
detergent with the water in the solution tank if detergent is desired in the solution.
164
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Right Side Scrub Brush
On machines equipped
with the optional Right Side
Scrub Brush, the solution is
plumbed from the solution
system to the Right Solution
Solenoid Valve (L11). The
Right Solution Solenoid
Valve opens along with the
Main Solution Solenoid Valve
Right
Solution
Solenoid
Valve
(L10) to allow solution flow
to the nozzle at the Right
Side Scrub Brush.
Main
Solution
Solenoid
Valve
Right
Side
Scrub
Brush
Wash Hose
The optional wash hose kit
uses a separate Wand Pump
(M8) to pump solution
from the solution tank to
the hose and Wash Hose
Nozzle located behind
the Operator seat. The
wash hose kit operates
independently and does
not require the Operator to
actuate the seat switch.
A pressure switch on the
Wand Pump will switch on
the Wand Pump when the
Wash Hose Nozzle is opened
and the solution pressure
in the hose drops below 40
psi. When the Wash Hose
Nozzle is closed and the
solution pressure in the
hose reaches 60 psi, the
pressure switch will switch
the Wand Pump off.
Wand
Pump
Wash
Hose
Nozzle
165
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
DustGuard™ Spray Nozzles
The DustGuard™ system
uses a separate Mist Pump
(M5) to pump solution
to the Mist Spray Nozzles
at the side brooms. The
Mist Pump will switch on
whenever the side broom
system is switched on.
Mist
Spray
Nozzles
Mist
Pump
Note that on machines
equipped with the
extended scrub option,
the Mist Pump will shut off
when the solution tank
runs out of clean solution.
Solution System Wiring Diagram
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
CB5
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
Battery
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 10A
CB2
2
Circuit Breaker, 20A
M5
M
+
1
-
Pump, Mist (optional)
M8
2 +
-
M
B
J3-18
Bat -
3
J3-23
K1
Bat -
B1
J2-1
Pump, Wand (optional)
S1
Switch, Ignition
Relay, Power
M4
M
+
-
J3-2
Bat - (PWM)
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
Pump, Solution
J1-10
M6
+
M
-
J2-35
Bat - (PWM)
J1-31
R1
1
J1-11
Pump, Ext. Scrub (optional)
Driver Box
3
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
L10
1
2
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
2
J2-22
Twisted Pair
Bat -
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
Valve, Main Solution
L11
1
2
J2-10
Bat -
Valve, Right Solution
B+
B- (ground)
J1-27
2
B- (ground)
J1-21
2
B- (ground)
J1-33
S2
S3
Pump, Detergent 1
M10
+
M
-
J3-21
J3-22
Bat +
Bat -
Switch, Extended Scrub (closes when the
recovery tank is empty)
Pump, Detergent 2
M11
M
-
J3-19
J3-20
Bat +
B- (ground)
Bat Bat +
1
Switch, Solution Empty (closes when the
solution tank is empty)
S7
Bat +
+
1
Switch, Recovery Full (opens when the recovery tank is full)
J1-5
2
S30
1
Switch, Seat
166
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Circuit Descriptions
Main Solution System
The Solution Pump M4 and Main Solution Solenoid Valve L10 control the solution flow to the scrub brushes. Note
that L10 is not a proportional valve and is either on or off. The voltage from J3-2 on the Driver Box to the
Solution Pump M4 is a PWM voltage proportional to the selected solution flow rate. The following conditions
must be met to allow the main solution system to operate:
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has
actuated the scrub or solution system.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
• The Solution Empty Switch S3 must be open (solution tank not empty).
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
CB5
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
Battery
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 10A
2
B
3
K1
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J2-1
Relay, Power
M4
+
M
-
J3-2
Bat - (PWM)
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
Pump, Solution
J1-10
J1-31
R1
1
J1-11
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
Driver Box
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
L10
1
2
2
J2-22
Twisted Pair
Bat -
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
Valve, Main Solution
B+
B- (ground)
J1-21
2
S3
1
Switch, Solution Empty (closes when the
solution tank is empty)
167
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Detergent System
The Detergent Pumps M10 and M11 receive voltage from J3-19, J3-20, J3-21 and J3-22 on the Driver Box. Note
that the voltage to the Detergent Pumps changes polarity to “extend” (deliver detergent) and “retract” the
pump.
Pump timing is designed so the pumps will alternate between cycles to deliver detergent in a more even
distribution. A pumping cycle for a given pump is defined as an extend time, followed by a retract time,
followed by a dwell time.
• Extend time – the time that the pump is being extended and is pumping detergent (80 ms fixed period).
• Retract time – the time that the pump is being retracted (50 ms fixed period).
• Dwell time – the period of time that a given pump is in the off state between pumping cycles.
In addition, there is an Interval Time which is defined as the delay from one Detergent Pump turning off
to the second Detergent Pump turning on. Hence, an interval of 0 indicates that one pump should turn on
without delay when the other pump turns off. The Interval Time is what controls the combined detergent
flow rate from both pumps, and comes from a lookup table based on the current solution flow rate and
detergent ratio.
The following conditions must be met for the Detergent Pumps to operate:
• The detergent system must be installed and enabled.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has
actuated the scrub or solution system.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
Battery
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
2
B
3
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J1-12
Pump, Detergent 1
M10
+
M
-
Ignition_KeyPos
Driver Box
J3-21
J3-22
Bat +
J1-10
Bat -
J1-31
Bat +
J1-11
R1
1
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
Pump, Detergent 2
M11
+
M
-
J3-19
J3-20
Bat +
Bat Bat +
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
168
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Extended Scrub System
The Extended Scrub Pump M6 pumps recovered water from the recovery tank to the brushes. The following
conditions must be met for the extended system to operate:
• The extended scrub system must be installed and enabled.
• If the machine is set to the USE CLEAN FIRST mode, the Solution Empty Switch S3 must be closed (the
solution tank is empty).
• The Extended Scrub (Float) Switch S7 must be open (adequate water supply in the recovery tank).
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has
actuated the scrub or solution system.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
CB5
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
Battery
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 10A
2
B
3
K1
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J2-1
Relay, Power
M6
+
M
-
J2-35
Bat - (PWM)
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
Pump, Ext. Scrub
(optional)
J1-10
J1-31
R1
1
J1-11
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
Driver Box
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
L10
1
2
2
J2-22
Twisted Pair
Bat -
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
Valve, Main Solution
B- (ground)
J1-21
B- (ground)
J1-33
2
S3
1
Switch, Solution Empty (closes when the
solution tank is empty)
B+
S7
Switch, Extended Scrub (closes when the
recovery tank is empty)
169
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Right Side Scrub
The Right Solution Solenoid Valve L11 controls the solution flow from the Solution Pump M4 to the optional right
side scrub brush. Note that L11 is not a proportional valve and is either on or off. The following conditions
must be met for solution to flow to the right side scrub brush:
• The side scrub system must be installed and enabled.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has
enabled the main scrub and side scrub systems.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
CB5
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
Battery
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 10A
2
B
3
K1
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J2-1
Relay, Power
M4
+
M
-
J3-2
Bat - (PWM)
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
Pump, Solution
J1-10
J1-31
R1
1
J1-11
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
Driver Box
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
L10
1
2
2
J2-22
Twisted Pair
Bat -
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
Valve, Main Solution
B- (ground)
L11
1
2
Valve, Right Solution
B+
J2-10
Bat -
J1-21
2
S3
1
Switch, Solution Empty (closes when the
solution tank is empty)
170
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Wash Hose System
The Wand Pump M8 has it own internal pressure switch that switches on the Wand Pump when the wash hose
nozzle is opened and the pressure in the wash hose drops to 40 psi. When the wash hose nozzle is closed and
the pressure in the wash hose reaches 60 psi, the pressure switch shuts off the Wand Pump. The key switch
must be on for the Wand Pump to operate.
K1
87
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
CB2
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 20A
2
B
3
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
Pressure M8
Switch
1
2 +
M
Driver Box
-
J3-23
Bat -
J1-12
Pump, Wand (optional)
J1-18
Ignition_KeyPos
Battery
12 VDC
171
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
DustGuard™ System
The Mist Pump M5 pumps solution to the two DustGuard™ nozzles adjacent to the side brooms while sweeping
to reduce dust. The following conditions must be met for the Mist Pump to operate:
• The DustGuard™ system must be installed and enabled.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has
enabled the side brooms.
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
K1
87
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
Battery
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
CB2
2
Circuit Breaker, 20A
M5
+
M
-
J3-18
B
Bat -
3
Pump, Mist (optional)
K1
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J2-1
Relay, Power
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
J1-10
J1-31
R1
1
J1-11
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
Driver Box
J6-1 (B+)
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
Twisted Pair
B- (ground)
J1-21
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
2
S3
1
Switch, Solution Empty (closes when the
solution tank is empty)
172
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Component Locations
Extended Scrub Pump M6
Extended Scrub (Float) Switch S7
Recovery Tank Full Switch S2
173
Service Manual – SC8000
Mist Pump M5 and
Solution Filter
Solution System
Solution Pump M4 (top)
Wand Pump M8 (bottom)
Detergent Pumps M10 and M11
(behind cover panel)
174
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key
switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
To Clean the Solution Filter Screen
1. Close the solution shutoff valve.
Note: Place a suitable container underneath the filter to catch any solution that may leak from the
hoses.
2. Unscrew the Filter Cover and remove the Filter Cover
and screen from the filter base.
3. Clean any accumulated dirt or debris from the screen.
4. Reinstall the screen into the filter base.
5. Make sure the rubber washer is installed correctly in
the Filter Cover, then reinstall and hand-tighten the
Filter Cover.
Solution
Filter
Filter
Cover
Rubber
Washer
Screen
Filter
Base
175
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
To Clean the Extended Scrub System Strainer
1. Open the recovery tank cover.
2. Rinse any accumulated material off of the extended scrub system strainer using normal water hose
pressure.
3. Close the recovery tank cover.
To Clean the Solution Delivery Trough
Clean the holes in the solution delivery trough to ensure even solution distribution.
To Clean the DustGuard™ Spray Nozzles
Note: Place a suitable container underneath the nozzles to catch any water that may leak from the
hoses.
1. Hold the Plastic Nozzle Adapter with a 7/8” Wrench to
keep it from rotating in the Spray Nozzle Bracket when
you remove the Nozzle Cap. This will maintain the
correct spray pattern orientation of the Spray Nozzle.
7/8” Wrench
Plastic
Nozzle
Adapter
2. Rotate the Nozzle Cap one-quarter turn
counterclockwise (as viewed from the front of the
machine) to remove the Nozzle Cap, Spray Nozzle and
Check Valve Strainer from the Plastic Nozzle Adapter.
3. Rinse the Nozzle Cap, Spray Nozzle and
Check Valve Strainer in clean water
to remove any accumulated dirt or
sediment. If necessary, rinse or soak
the components in vinegar or other
commercial cleaner to remove any
mineral deposits.
4. Reassemble the DustGuard™ nozzles
by following the above steps in reverse
order.
Nozzle
Cap
Nozzle
Cap
Spray
Nozzle
Check
Valve
Strainer
Plastic
Nozzle
Adapter
Spray
Nozzle
Bracket
To Adjust the DustGuard™ Spray
Nozzles
The Spray Nozzles should be approximately
10 to 20 degrees from vertical as shown
in order to spray the water evenly top to
bottom in front of the side brooms. The
spray pattern should wet the floor across
the whole width of the side broom. If the
spray pattern is not correct:
1. Carefully rotate the Plastic Nozzle Adapter with a 7/8” Wrench to orient the Spray Nozzle.
Brass
Nozzle
Adapter
176
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
2. After you rotate the Plastic Nozzle Adapter, make sure the Brass Nozzle Adapter is holding the Plastic
Nozzle Adapter securely in the Spray Nozzle Bracket. Tighten the Brass Nozzle Adapter to the Plastic Nozzle
Adapter as necessary.
Detergent System Maintenance
You will need to purge the system of the previous detergent when switching to a different detergent.
Service Note: Move the machine over a floor drain before purging because a small amount of
detergent will be dispensed in the process.
To Purge When Changing Detergents (the scrub system must be off)
1. Disconnect and remove the detergent cartridge.
2. Turn the key switch on and wait a few seconds for the start-up sequence to finish.
3. Press and hold the detergent switch for approximately two seconds.
4. Release the switch when the detergent Purge Icon
appears on the display and the detergent indicator
starts flashing.
Purge
Icon
Note: Once activated, the purge process takes at least 10 seconds for AXP™/EDS systems, and at
least 20 seconds for EcoFlex™ systems. Normally one purge cycle is adequate to purge the
system.
177
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
To Purge Weekly (the scrub system must be off)
1. Disconnect and remove the detergent cartridge.
2. Install and connect a cartridge filled with clean hot water.
3. Turn the key switch on and wait a few seconds for the start-up sequence to finish.
4. Press and hold the detergent switch for approximately two seconds.
5. Release the switch when the detergent Purge Icon appears on the display and the detergent indicator
starts flashing.
Note:The Detergent Box has Detergent
Level Viewing Slots for viewing the
amount of detergent remaining in
the Detergent Cartridge(s). When
the detergent level is nearing the
bottom of the Detergent Level Viewing
Slots, refill or replace the Detergent
Cartridge(s).
Cap
Dry Break
Cap and
Insert
Detergent
Cartridge (2)
Detergent
Box
Detergent
Level
Viewing
Slots
178
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
To Change the Detergent Mix Ratio (the scrub system must be on)
1. Press and hold the detergent switch for two seconds.
2. Release the switch once the detergent indicator begins flashing.
3. While the light is flashing, press and release the
detergent switch to cycle through the available
detergent mixture ratios. Once the desired ratio is
displayed, stop pressing the detergent switch to lock
in the displayed ratio. The detergent system will
return to normal operation within three seconds.
Detergent
Ratio
Note: On AXP™ and EDS systems, the
detergent mixture will be displayed for
approximately 10 seconds each time the
scrub mode changes, or each time the
detergent switch is pressed. On EcoFlex™
systems, the detergent mixture will be
displayed whenever the detergent system
is on.
Once set, the detergent flow rate automatically increases and decreases with the solution
flow rate, but the detergent mix ratio will remain the same. If an Operator would prefer the
flexibility of setting different detergent dilutions ratios for different solution flow rates, this
specific programming option can be found in the Control System section.
Note: During scrubbing, the detergent system can be turned off at any time by pressing the
detergent switch to allow scrubbing with water only. No detergent is dispensed until the
scrub system is activated and the drive pedal is pushed forward.
Service Note: Follow the To Purge Weekly instructions above if the machine is going to be stored
for an extended period of time, or if you plan to discontinue use of the detergent
system.
179
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
No solution to the
main brushes
No voltage to the main
solution pump
1. Check the wiring and circuit breakers upstream of
the pump.
2. Check the J3-2 output from the Driver Box.
Solution pump(s) over
current (fault code 00
displayed)
• Check the M4 main solution pump wiring for
problems; M4 wire colors (+GRN/BRN and - GRN/
BLU).
• Check the pump current draw (11.5 amps max.)
and replace as necessary.
• Check pump motor for short circuits and replace
as necessary.
Main solution solenoid valve
over current (fault code 07
displayed)
• Check L10 solenoid coil wiring for problems
(+ ORN and - YEL/GRN).
The solution shutoff valve is
plugged or inoperative.
Clean or replace the solution shutoff valve.
Inadequate solution
flow to the main
brushes
The solution filter screen is
plugged.
Clean the solution filter screen.
Plugged solution hose
Check and clear the solution hoses as necessary.
No solution to the
DustGuard™ spray
nozzles
Side sweep mist pump
over current (fault code 04
displayed)
• Check Pump motor M5 wiring for problems (+ BLU
and - YEL/BLK).
No voltage to the mist pump
1. Check the wiring and circuit breakers upstream of
the pump.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace.
• Check the mist pump current draw (3.9 amps max.
at full load). Note: The mist pump is a 24V pump
operating at 12V.
2. Check the J3-18 output from the Driver Box.
Spray nozzles plugged
Clean the spray nozzles.
180
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Problem
Cause
Correction
No solution to the
main brushes in
the extended scrub
mode
The extended scrub function
is not installed in the
configuration menu.
Install the extended scrub function in the
configuration menu.
Solution pump(s) over
current (fault code 00
displayed)
• Check the M6 extended scrub pump wiring for
problems; M6 wire colors (+GRN/BRN and - GRA/
ORN).
• Check the pump current draw (11.5 amps max.)
and replace as necessary.
The extended scrub (float)
switch (S7) is not open to
J1-33 on the Driver Box.
The switch should be closed when the recovery tank
is empty, and open when there is an adequate water
supply in the recovery tank.
If the continuity through the switch in its open and
closed positions is not correct:
1. Check the wiring and repair as necessary.
2. If the wiring is OK, replace the switch.
No voltage to the extended
scrub pump
1. Check pump motors for short circuits and replace
as necessary. Check the wiring and circuit
breakers upstream of the pump.
2. Check the J2-35 output from the Driver Box.
The stainer in the recovery
tank is dirty or plugged.
Remove and clean the strainer.
Note:The Solution Pump (-) line provides a switched ground return for the pump.
When the solution pump is “ON” a 7.8 KHz signal with a varying duty cycle and
average voltage will appear between pin J3-2 and B+. Measuring with a DC
voltmeter will give a signal in the range of 0 to 12 volts. Changing the flow rate
solution bars on the LCD should produce a relative increase or decrease of the
meter reading.
No solution to the
right side brush
Inadequate solution
flow to the right side
brush
Right side solution solenoid
valve over current (fault
code 08 displayed)
• Check L11 solenoid coil wiring for problems
(+ ORN and - BLU/YEL).
Plugged solution hose and/
or nozzle
Check and clear/clean the solution hoses and
nozzles as necessary.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 10 ohms,
replace.
181
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Problem
Cause
Correction
No detergent flow to
the solution system
The detergent system not
installed in the configuration
menu.
Install the detergent system in the configuration
menu.
The detergent supply lines
are clogged.
Check the detergent lines and clean/replace as
necessary.
The detergent cartridge is
empty.
Refill the cartridge or switch the dry break cap and
insert into a full cartridge.
No voltage to the detergent
pump(s)
1. Check the wiring from J3-21 and J3-22 to
detergent pump 1, and the wiring from J3-19 and
J3-20 to detergent pump 2.
2. Check the J3-19, J3-20, J3-21 and J3-22 outputs
from the Driver Box.
Detergent pump 1 over
current (fault code 31
displayed)
• Check the detergent pump wiring for problems; #1
pump wire colors (+RED/WHT and - RED/BLU),
#2 pump wire colors (+ BLK/ YEL and - BLK/RED).
Detergent pump 2 over
current (fault code 32
displayed)
• Check the detergent pump motors for short circuit
and replace as necessary.
Note:The signal controlling the detergent pump is extremely complex and field
troubleshooting should a take a functional approach. Substitute with a known
good detergent pump to check operation. If the known good pump does not
operate, and the wiring and control inputs to the detergent system are correct,
check the Driver Box. Check the resistance of the detergent pump before
replacing the Driver Box so as not to damage it if the pump is defective.
No solution flow
from the wash hose
wand
Wand pump over current
(fault code 03 displayed)
• Check Pump motor M8 wiring for problems (+ BLU
and - BLU/RED).
• Check pump motor for short circuit and replace as
necessary.
• Test current draw 12.5 amps max., 12V at full load.
No voltage to the wand
pump
1. Check the wiring and circuit breakers upstream of
the pump .
2. Check the J3-23 output from the Driver Box.
Pressure switch not
operating correctly
Check the pressure switch and replace as
necessary.
182
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Main and Right Side Solution Valves and Solution Pump
The following conditions must be met for the Main and Right Side Solution Valves and Main Solution Pump to
operate:
• The Key Switch must be on.
MAIN & RIGHT SIDE SCRUB BRUSH
SOLUTION VALVES & PUMP
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub on mode must be
selected on the Dashboard Panel.
• The drive pedal must be
activated (moved from the
neutral position).
CB4
RED/VIO
ORN
20A
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
CB5
S1
RED/VIO
GRN/BRN
10A
KEY SWITCH
B1
B-
DRIVER BOX
M4
GRN/BLU
MAIN SOLUTION
PUMP
PIN J3-2
B- OUTPUT
YEL/GRN
MAIN SOLUTION
VALVE
12VDC
L11
BLU/YEL
RIGHT SIDE
SOLUTION VALVE
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
12VDC
L10
B+
PIN J2-22
B- OUTPUT
PIN J2-10
B- OUTPUT
183
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Specifications
Component Specifications
Component
Specifications
Voltage – 12 VDC
Solution Pump M4
Max. Current – 11.5 amps @ 60 psi
Extended Scrub Pump M6
Open Flow – 3.4 GPM
Internal Bypass – 60 psi
Voltage – 12 VDC
Coil Power – 17W
Main Solution Solenoid Valve L10
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Voltage – 12 VDC
Right Side Solution Solenoid Valve
L11
Coil Power – 11W
Current – 1.0 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 12 ohms
Voltage – 12 VDC
Max. Current – 12.5 amps @ 60 psi
Wand Pump M8
Flow Rate – 2.0 GPM @ 50 psi
Pressure Switch
On: 40 psi
Off: 60 psi
Voltage – 24 VDC (run at 12 VDC)
Mist Pump M5
Max. Current – 3.9 amps
DustGuard™ Spray Nozzles
Standard nozzle size .015” dia. Flow volume –
.033 gal/min [0.125 L/min] @ 40 psi.
Optional nozzle size .026 Dia. Flow volume –
.1 gal/min [.379 L/min] @ 40 psi.
184
Service Manual – SC8000
Solution System
Solution and Detergent Delivery Rates
Setting 1 – 1.6 gal/min [6 L/min]
Setting 2 – 1.9 gal/min [7.2 L/min]
Solution system flow rates (five settings)
Setting 3 – 2.3 gal/min [8.7 L/min]
Setting 4 – 2.7 gal/min [10.2 L/min]
Setting 5 – 3.1 gal/min [11.7 L/min]
Available dilution ratios:
AXP™/EDS and EcoFlex™
detergent systems
Refillable cartridge,
(quantity 2), 2.5 gal [9.5 L]
03%, .04%, .05%, .07%, .08%, 1.0%, 1.5%,
2.0%, 3.0%, 3.8%
300:1, 256:1, 200:1, 150:1, 128:1, 100:1,
64:1, 50:1, 32:1, 26:1
185
Service Manual – SC8000
186
Squeegee System
Functional Description
Overview
The squeegee system includes the squeegee assembly, squeegee mounting assembly, squeegee lift weldment
and the squeegee lift cylinder.
The squeegee assembly is mounted at the bottom rear of the machine and picks up the water from the floor.
Two squeegee blades (front and rear) pick up the water and direct it into the vacuum hose which carries it to
the recovery tank. The squeegee lift cylinder raises and lowers the squeegee as appropriate for the operation
being performed.
Squeegee System Wiring Diagram
K1
87
30
1
F1
Battery
2
Fuse, 100A
Relay, Power
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
Circuit Breaker, 10A
2
B
3
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
K1
J2-1
Relay, Power
L2
1
2
J2-5
Bat -
J6-1 (B+)
J6-2 (B-)
Squeegee Down S2
L3
1
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN 2
J2-6
Bat -
Twisted Pair
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
Squeegee Up S3
Driver Box
J1-10
J1-31
J1-11
R1
1
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
J1-27
2
S2
1
Switch, Recovery Full (opens when the recovery tank is full)
J1-18
Circuit Description
For the squeegee system to work, the key switch must be on, the engine must be running and the Driver Box
must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has actuated the scrub
system, vacuum switch (old style control panel) or the vacuum/wand switch (new style control panel).
Service Manual – SC8000
Squeegee System
Squeegee System Hydraulic Diagrams
Squeegee Down
When the main scrub or recovery system is
actuated, the Squeegee Down Solenoid Valve L2
energizes to direct the oil to the top port on the
Squeegee Lift Cylinder. This extends the Squeegee
Lift Cylinder and lowers the squeegee to the
floor. The oil discharged from the Squeegee Lift
Cylinder returns to the Reservoir.
Squeegee
Lift Cylinder
Squeegee
Down
The hydraulic pressure to lift and lower the
squeegee is created by:
Squeegee Down
Solenoid Valve L2
• The 250 psi propulsion piston pump charge
pressure relief valve, and,
• The back pressure created by the return flow
through the cooler and filter en route to the
piston pump charge port.
250 psi Back
Pressure
Reservoir
Squeegee Up
To retract the squeegee (scrub off, recovery off,
machine in reverse), the Squeegee Up Solenoid
Valve L3 energizes to direct the oil to the
bottom port on the Squeegee Lift Cylinder. This
retracts the Squeegee Lift Cylinder and raises the
squeegee up off of the floor. The oil discharged
from the Squeegee Lift Cylinder returns to the
Reservoir.
Squeegee
Lift Cylinder
Squeegee Up
Squeegee Up
Solenoid Valve L3
250 psi Back
Pressure
Reservoir
187
Service Manual – SC8000
Squeegee System
Squeegee Locked
When the squeegee is up (retracted), both
the Squeegee Down Solenoid Valve L2 and
the Squeegee Up Solenoid Valve L3 are
de-energized to shut off the flow of oil to
the Squeegee Lift Cylinder and lock the
squeegee in the up position.
Squeegee
Lift Cylinder
Squeegee Up
Solenoid Valve L3
Squeegee Down
Solenoid Valve L2
250 psi Back
Pressure
Reservoir
188
Service Manual – SC8000
Squeegee System
Component Locations
The Squeegee Assembly
mounts onto the Squeegee
Mount Assembly.
The Squeegee Mount Assembly
is fastened to the Squeegee
Lift Weldment. The Squeegee
Lift Cylinder is connected to
the Squeegee Lift Weldment
and raises and lowers the
Squeegee Lift Weldment and
attached Squeegee Assembly as
required.
Parallel Arms, bushings,
bearings and fasteners connect
the Squeegee Lift Weldment to
the machine frame.
The Squeegee Tilt Adjust Knob
and the Squeegee Height Adjust
Knobs allow you to adjust
the angle and height of the
Squeegee Assembly to ensure
that the wastewater is being
picked up correctly.
Squeegee
Lift
Cylinder
Parallel
Arm (4)
Squeegee Lift
Weldment
Squeegee
Tilt Adjust
Knob
Squeegee
Mount
Assembly
Squeegee
Height Adjust
Knob (2)
(Refer to the Squeegee
Adjustment section in the
Instructions for Use for
adjustment procedures.)
Squeegee
Assembly
189
Service Manual – SC8000
Squeegee System
The Squeegee Down Solenoid Valve
S2 and the Squeegee Up Solenoid
Valve S3 that control the Squeegee
Lift Cylinder are located on the
hydraulic manifold at the rear of
the machine as shown.
Squeegee
Down Solenoid
Valve S2 (top)
Squeegee Up
Solenoid Valve
S3 (bottom)
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
Poor Water Pick-up
The squeegee blades are
torn or worn.
Check and replace the blades as necessary.
The squeegee assembly is
out of adjustment.
Readjust the squeegee. (Refer to the Instructions for
Use.)
The squeegee
system is not
working.
Squeegee UP solenoid over
current (fault code 11 is
displayed)
Squeegee DN solenoid over
current (fault code 12 is
displayed)
Squeegee will not
rise
Solenoid L3 is not
energizing or has failed
Pressure to the squeegee
lift cylinder is too low.
• Check L3 solenoid coil wiring for problems
(+ GRN/BRN and - BRN/GRN).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace.
Also see Vacuum Fan Off and Squeegee Up
electrical ladder detail.
• Check L2 solenoid coil wiring for problems
(+ GRN/BRN and - RED/GRA).
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace.
Also see Vacuum Fan On and Squeegee Down
electrical ladder detail.
• Check L3 solenoid coil wiring for problems
(+ GRN/BRN and - BRN/GRN).
• If there is voltage to L3, replace the solenoid.
Check the pressure at the charge port on the
propulsion piston pump. Pressure should be 250 psi.
If the pressure is too low, clean or replace the charge
relief cartridge located on the wheel drive pump.
Note: The squeegee may lift more slowly with the
engine at idle.
The squeegee linkage is
binding
Check the squeegee linkage and mounts and correct
as necessary.
190
Service Manual – SC8000
Squeegee System
Vacuum Fan On and Squeegee Down
The following conditions must be met for the Vacuum Fan to run and for the squeegee to be lowered to the
pick-up position:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub on mode must be selected or the vacuum system switched on at the Dashboard Panel.
VACUUM
FAN from
ON & the
SQUEEGEE
• The drive pedal must be activated
(moved
neutralDOWN
position).
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
CB5
S1
GRN/BRN
10A
KEY SWITCH
B1
BDRIVER BOX
12VDC
RED/GRA
L2
B- OUTPUT
SQUEEGEE
DOWN
12VDC
BRN/YEL
L1
B+
PIN J2-5
VACUUM FAN
SOLENOID
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
PIN J2-8
B- OUTPUT
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L1
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
L2
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
191
Service Manual – SC8000
Squeegee System
Vacuum Fan Off and Squeegee Up
The following conditions must be met for the Vacuum Fan to shut off and for the squeegee to be raised to the
travel position:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub off mode must be selected or the vacuum system switched off at the Dashboard Panel, or the
drive pedal must be moved to the reverse position (squeegee will rise up).
The Vacuum Fan will shut off afterVACUUM
a time delay
once
the drive pedal
is in the neutral position. Note that
FAN OFF
& SQUEEGEE
UP
if the seat switch is open, the Vacuum Fan will run continuously (regardless of the drive pedal being in
neutral) to allow water pick-up with the Wand attachment.
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
CB5
GRN/BRN
S1
RED/VIO
10A
B1
B-
DRIVER BOX
12VDC
L3
KEY SWITCH
BRN/GRN
SQUEEGEE
UP SOLENOID
PIN J2-6
B- OUTPUT
B+
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
0V
L2
SQUEEGEE
DOWN
0V
L1
VACUUM FAN
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L3
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
192
Service Manual – SC8000
Squeegee System
Specifications
Component
Squeegee Down Solenoid
Valve L2
Squeegee Up Solenoid
Valve L3
Specifications
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
193
Service Manual – SC8000
194
Steering System
Functional Description
Overview
The steering system includes the
steering unit, Steer Cylinder, Rack
and Spur Gear.
The steering wheel rotates the
shaft on the steering pump which
controls the oil flow to the Steer
Cylinder. The Steer Cylinder extends
and retracts the attached Rack,
which then rotates the Spur Gear
and attached Drive Wheel Weldment
to turn the Front Wheel.
Hydraulic
Connections to
Steering Pump
Rack
Spur
Gear
Steer
Cylinder
Drive Wheel
Weldment
Front
Wheel
Service Manual – SC8000
Steering System
Hydraulic Diagrams
Steering System in Motion
When the engine is
running and the Operator
turns the steering wheel,
the Auxiliary Pump sends
oil through the Priority Flow
Divider to the Steering Unit.
The Steering Unit directs
the oil to the Metering
Valve, which then directs
the oil to the appropriate
side of the Steer Cylinder to
turn the front wheel in the
corresponding direction.
The oil returns through
the Steering Unit and
returns to the Reservoir.
The Check Valve, located
in the Steering Unit, allows
manual steering when the
engine is off.
Steering
Unit
Metering
Valve
Check
Valve
Steer
Cylinder
Priority
Flow
Divider
Auxiliary
Pump
Reservoir
Metering
Valve
Check
Valve
Steer
Cylinder
Priority
Flow
Divider
Steering
Unit
Auxiliary
Pump
Reservoir
195
Service Manual – SC8000
Steering System
Steering System
Stationary
When the steering wheel is
stationary, no oil is flowing
through the Steering Unit,
Metering Valve or Steer
Cylinder.
Steering
Unit
Metering
Valve
Check
Valve
Steer
Cylinder
Priority
Flow
Divider
Auxiliary
Pump
Reservoir
Component Locations
Steering Unit
The Steering Unit is driven by the
steering wheel and is located in
the steering column. The Steering
Unit unit includes the internal
metering valve.
Steering
Unit
196
Service Manual – SC8000
Steering System
Steer Cylinder
The Steer Cylinder is mounted
horizontally and drives the rack
and spur gear connected to the
drive wheel assembly
Steer
Cylinder
Steer
Cylinder
197
Service Manual – SC8000
Steering System
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The steering
“wanders”.
Backlash in the spur gear
and rack
Adjust the rack so it’s closer to the spur gear.
The steering is hard
or “jerky”.
Not enough oil to the
steering system
Clean or replace the priority flow divider cartridge on
the accessory/auxiliary pump.
Removal and Installation
Warning! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch
is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Note: If the steer cylinder is removed, mark the teeth where the rack engages the spur gear so the
rack and spur gear engage at the same location when the steer cylinder is reinstalled.
Specifications
Component
Specifications
Steering
Front wheel, hydraulic cylinder and rotary valve
controlled
Maximum System Pressure – 2030 psi
Maximum Back Pressure – 300 psi
Steering Unit
Maximum Flow – 5 GPM
Displacement – 4.5 CIR
Check Valve for Manual Steering – Yes
198
Service Manual – SC8000
199
Sweep System, Side Broom
Functional Description
Overview
The side broom sweep system is available with either with a single left-hand side broom (with right side
scrub brush), or with dual side brooms. Both configurations use DustGuard™ nozzles to spray solution in
front of the broom(s) to minimize dust.
The side broom hydraulic motors are powered by the oil from the discharge side of the two main scrub brush
motors. The side sweep/scrub solenoid valve S8 controls the oil flow to the side broom hydraulic motor(s).
The side broom(s) use an electric lift actuator to raise and lower the broom(s).
Side Broom Sweep System Wiring Diagram
K1
CB4
87
Circuit Breaker, 20A
Battery
F1
1
2
Fuse, 100A
30
Relay, Power
12 VDC
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
2
B
3
K1
Driver Box
S1
Switch, Ignition
B1
J2-1
Relay, Power
J1-12
Ignition_KeyPos
L4
1
2
J2-7
J6-1 (B+)
Bat -
Scrub Brush S4
J1-3 CAN +
J1-2 CAN -
L8
1
2
J2-2
J6-3 CAN +
J6-4 CAN -
Twisted Pair
Bat -
J6-2 (B-)
Dashboard Panel
Twisted Pair
M7
Side Sweep/Scrub (S8)
J3-5
BLK
Actuator, Side Broom
J3-4
M
WHT
RED
J3-7
J1-10
J1-31
J1-11
R1
1
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
M7 Actuator Motor
Wiring:
(-) White & (+) Red = CW
(extend)
(+) White & (-) Black = CCW
(retract)
White = Common
J1-18
Circuit Description
For the side broom system to work, the key switch must be on, the engine must be running and the Driver
Box must receive a signal from the Dashboard Panel via the CAN Bus that the Operator has actuated the
main scrub system, and has not disabled the side broom system.
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Side Broom Motor(s)
For the side broom motor(s) to run:
• The Driver Box must receive a signal from the Drive Pedal Sensor R1 that the drive pedal has been moved
from the neutral position.
• The main scrub brush motors must be running to supply oil to side broom motor(s).
• The Driver Box must provide a ground from pin J2-2 to the Side Sweep/Scrub solenoid valve S8 to open the
valve and allow oil to flow to the side broom motor(s).
Side Broom Actuator
For the side broom actuator to raise or lower the side broom(s), the Driver Box must provide voltage at the
appropriate polarity from J3-4 (RED extend) or J3-5 (BLK retract). Pin J3-7 (WHT) is the common.
Side Broom Sweep System Hydraulic Diagrams
Side Broom Motor(s) Off
When the two Side Broom Motors, or the Right Side Scrub Motor
and left Side Broom Motor are off, the Side Sweep/Scrub Valve L8 is
closed (de-energized). The Side Sweep/Scrub Valve L8 directs the oil
from the Cylindrical Scrub Brush Motors to the oil Cooler and filter,
bypassing the Side Scrub/Broom Motors.
From Cylindrical
Scrub Brush Motors
Right Side
Scrub Motor
or
Side Broom
Motor (w/dual
sweep)
Side Broom
Motor
Side
Sweep/Scrub
Valve L8
To Cooler
200
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Side Broom Motor(s) On
When the two Side Broom Motors, or the Right Side Scrub Motor
and left Side Broom Motor are on, the Side Sweep/Scrub Valve L8 is
energized to direct the oil from the discharge side of the Cylindrical
Scrub Brush Motors to the Side Scrub/Broom Motors. The oil then
travels from the discharge side of the Side Scrub/Broom Motors to
the oil Cooler and filter.
From Cylindrical
Scrub Brush Motors
Right Side
Scrub Motor
Side Broom
Motor (w/dual
sweep)
Side Broom
Motor
Side
Sweep/Scrub
Valve L8
To Cooler
201
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Component Locations
Mist
Pump M5
Single (left-hand) Sweep
The single (left-hand) sweep system is
installed on the front of the machine
in conjunction with a right-hand scrub
system.
Side
Sweep/Scrub
Valve L8
The Side Broom Assembly is mounted on
the Side Broom Lift Weldment. The Actuator
Motor extends and retracts the pivot arm
on the Side Broom Lift Weldment to raise
and lower the Side Broom Assembly.
Actuator
Motor
The DustGuard™ Mist Pump M5 supplies
solution to the Nozzle Assembly to reduce
the dust generated during sweeping.
The Side Sweep/Scrub Valve L8 controls
the hydraulic oil to the Hydraulic Motor
on the Side Broom Assembly to switch the
Hydraulic Motor on and off.
Side Broom
Lift Weldment
Nozzle
Assembly
Hydraulic
Motor
Side Broom
Assembly
202
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Dual Sweep
The dual sweep system
is installed on the front
of the machine and uses
two Side Broom Assemblies
with no right side scrub
motor.
Mist
Pump M5
Side
Sweep/Scrub
Valve L8
The Side Broom Assemblies
are mounted on the Side
Broom Lift Weldment. The
Actuator Motor extends
and retracts the pivot
arm on the Side Broom
Lift Weldment to raise
and lower the Side Broom
Assemblies.
Actuator
Motor
The DustGuard™ Mist Pump
M5 supplies solution to the
two Nozzle Assemblies.
The Side Sweep/Scrub Valve
L8 controls the hydraulic
oil to the Hydraulic
Motors on the Side Broom
Assemblies to switch the
Hydraulic Motors on and off.
Hydraulic
Motor (2)
Side
Broom Lift
Weldment
Nozzle
Assembly (2)
Side Broom
Assembly (2)
203
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
The Right Side Scrub/Sweep Solenoid Valve
S8/L8 controls the side sweep motor(s). S8/
L8 is located above the front end of the
Scrub Deck.
Scrub
Deck
S8/L8
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key
switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
To Adjust the Side Broom Lift Actuator Motor
1. Assemble the jumper wire that you’ll
need to connect machine battery
to the three-wire connector on the
actuator. Refer to the adjacent Jumper
Wire Assembly Schematic and Bill of
Material.
Important Service Note:
The power cord adapter (p/n
56407502), normally used on all
other two-wire actuator motors,
should not be used on the side
broom lift actuator motor.
The Jumper Wire Assembly Schematic
illustrates the correct battery polarity
(+ and -) power inputs to operate the
actuator motor for both extending and
retracting the drive nut.
Jumper Wire Assembly Schematic
204
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
2. Connect the jumper wiring as shown
to run the actuator motor in the
Retract (IN) mode.
3. Hold the steel Drive Nut Tube and
press the switch to run the Drive Nut
Tube toward the motor housing (its IN
limit).
4. Measure the position of the Drive
Nut Tube on the actuator shaft, then
compare it to the retracted (IN)
dimension specification as shown.
5. Manually turn the steel Drive Nut Tube
to match the IN dimension shown.
6. Connect the jumper wiring to run the
actuator motor in the Extend (OUT)
mode.
7. Hold the Drive Nut Tube and press the
switch to run the Drive Nut Tube to the
OUT position. Wait for the motor to
stop once it reaches its OUT limit.
8. Measure the position of the Drive
Nut Tube on the actuator shaft and
compare the measurement with the
OUT dimension shown.
Drive Nut
Tube
Adjuster
Cover
9. If the OUT measurement doesn’t
match the dimension shown, it will
be necessary to remove the rubber
Adjuster Cover and rotate the outside
hex adjuster underneath the Adjuster
Cover.
Note: Use a 1/2” (13mm) socket to turn the outside hex adjuster. Each click of the adjuster (cam)
will change the Drive Nut Tube travel 1/16” (1.6mm).
• To increase the Drive Nut Tube OUT dimension, turn the adjuster clockwise.
• To decrease the Drive Nut Tube OUT dimension, turn the adjuster counterclockwise.
10. Hold the Drive Nut Tube, run the actuator to the IN and OUT positions and check both dimensions after
each adjustment.
Note: When checking the directional travel dimensions, remember to change the connections
(battery polarity) of the jumper wires.
11. Once the Drive Nut Tube travel limits are set correctly, reinstall the Adjuster Cover.
Service Tip: Leave the correctly-adjusted actuator motor in the out (extended) position when you
reinstall the motor.
205
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
Side Sweep System
not working
Right side scrub/sweep
motor solenoid valve over
current (fault code 16
displayed)
• Check L8 solenoid coil wiring for problems (+ ORN
and - BLK/WHT).
Side sweep lift actuator
over current (fault code 30
displayed)
• Three wires supply power to the M7 side broom
lift actuator motor; check wiring for problems. Wire
colors J3-4 BLU/RED (+) DN otherwise open, J3-5
WHT/RED (-) UP otherwise open, J3-7 GRA/VIO
common wire + UP and - DN.
• Check coil resistance. If less than 6 ohms, replace.
Also see the Main Scrub and Side Sweep/Scrub
On electrical ladder detail.
• Test current draw full load 20A ±2A max.
• Check for frozen or binding lift linkage. Repair/
replace as needed.
206
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Main Scrub and Side Sweep/Scrub On
The following conditions must be met for the Side Sweep Broom motor(s) to run:
• The Key Switch must be on.
• The engine must be running.
• The scrub on mode and side broom/scrub must be selected on the Dashboard Panel.
• The drive pedal must be activated (moved from the neutral position).
CB4
ORN
B+ from
K1 Power Relay
20A
S1
KEY SWITCH
B1
BDRIVER BOX
12VDC
L4
ORN/BLU
B- OUTPUT
MAIN SCRUB
BRUSH
12VDC
L8
B+
PIN J2-7
BLK/WHT
SIDE SWEEP/
RIGHT SCRUB
B-
TOUCH PAD
DASHBOARD PANEL
PIN J2-2
B- OUTPUT
Component
Current - Amps
Coil Resistance - Ohms
L4
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
L8
1.5 Amps
8 ohms
207
Service Manual – SC8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Specifications
Component
Scrub Brush Solenoid Valve
L4
Side Sweep/Scrub Solenoid
Valve L8
Specifications
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Current – 1.5 amps
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 ohms
Displacement – 17.9 Cu. In. Per Revolution
Side Broom Motor
Rotation - Clockwise (as viewed from shaft end)
Pressure Port - A
208
Service Manual – SC8000
209
Wheel System, Non-traction
Functional Description
The non-traction wheel system supports the rear of the machine and includes the braking system.
The Rear Wheel Assemblies
are fastened to the Finished
Spindles with a single 3/8”16 x .75” Hex Screw and flat
washer.
3/8”-16 x .75”
Hex Screw
The Brake Assemblies are
fastened to the Finished
Spindles with four 3/8”-16 x
.75” Hex Screws.
Brake
Assembly
The Finished Spindles are
fastened to the machine
frame with four 1/2”-13 x
1.25” Hex Screws.
Finished
Spindle
Rear Wheel
Assembly
3/8”-16 x .75”
Hex Screw (4)
1/2”-13 x 1.25”
Hex Screw (4)
The Brake Cable
Assembly connects
the Brake Pedal
Assembly to
the Brake Bar
Weldment. The
Brake Bar Weldment
actuates the brake
levers on the Brake
Assemblies.
Brake Cable
Assembly
Brake Pedal
Assembly
Brake Bar
Weldment
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Non-traction
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key
switch is off and the key is removed from the machine.
Brake Tension Adjustment
1. Remove the floor weldment, located in the
Operator’s compartment, to access the Rod
End.
2. Remove the Nyloc® Nut and remove the Rod
End from the brake pedal assembly.
3. Loosen the Jam Nut and rotate the Rod End in
the appropriate direction to adjust the brake
tension.
4. When the brake tension has been adjusted,
tighten the Jam Nut.
Jam
Nut
Rod
End
5. Reinstall the Rod End into the brake pedal
assembly, then reinstall and tighten the
Nyloc® Nut.
6. Check the brake tension as follows:
a. Jack up the rear of the machine to get the
rear wheels off of the ground.
Nyloc®
Nut
Caution! Make sure to follow the
instructions in the General
Information/Jacking The
Machine section. Jack the
machine at the designated
locations only.
b. Manually rotate the rear wheels to check the brake tension. The tension is set correctly when the
wheels cannot be rotated with the parking brake applied to three “clicks”, but will rotate freely when
the parking brake is off.
c. Readjust the brake tension as necessary following steps 2 through 5 above.
7. When the brake tension is adjusted correctly, lower the machine and reinstall the floor weldment.
210
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Non-traction
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The wheels are
making excess
noise.
The wheel bearings are
worn.
Check the wheel assembly, wheel bearings and
spindle and replace as required.
The brakes are not
working correctly.
The wheel and/or spindle is
damaged.
The brakes are out of
adjustment.
Adjust the brake tension.
The brake linings are worn
out.
Replace the brake linings.
Specifications
Component
Specifications
Brakes (service)
Mechanical drum brakes, one on each rear wheel, cable
actuated
Tire (rear 2) load bearing
Size 16 in x 4 in [406 mm x 101 mm] solid
211
Service Manual – SC8000
212
Wheel System, Traction
Functional Description
Overview
The traction wheel system includes the hydraulic traction drive motor and drive wheel, and the foot pedal/
hydroback system.
The traction drive motor is driven
by the variable-displacement
Piston Pump which allows speed
and directional control. The Piston
Pump and traction drive motor
hydraulic system is a closed
system, but allows for programmed
oil leakage through the Piston
Pump for lubrication and cooling
purposes. This leaked oil returns
to the reservoir and requires
make-up oil that is supplied to the
Piston Pump through the charge
circuit.
Piston
Pump
Piston Pump
Lever
Weldment
Piston Pump
The Piston Pump is driven by the
engine and powers the hydraulic
traction drive motor.
Foot Pedal, Hydroback and
Rotary Sensor
The foot pedal actuates the
Push/Pull Control Cable which
is connected to the Hydroback
Centering Unit.
Rotary
Sensor
Push/Pull
Control
Cable
Hydroback
Centering
Unit
Piston Pump
Lever
Weldment
The Hydroback Centering Unit transfers the Push/Pull Control Cable motion to the Piston Pump Lever Weldment
attached to the Piston Pump to control machine direction and speed. The Hydroback Centering Unit also returns
the foot pedal and Piston Pump Lever Weldment to the neutral position when the foot pedal is released.
The Rotary (Drive Pedal) Sensor is a 0 to 5K ohm potentiometer that rotates with the Piston Pump Lever
Weldment. The resistance through the Rotary Sensor will vary with the position of the Piston Pump Lever
Weldment. The Driver Box monitors the voltage through Rotary Sensor to ensure that the foot pedal is in
neutral before the engine can be started, and to actuate the scrub/sweep functions when the foot pedal is
moved from the neutral position.
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Traction Drive Motor
The Traction Drive Motor is an 18.3
CIR hydraulic motor and drives
the Front Wheel.
A tow valve, when actuated,
bypasses the hydraulic circuit
from the piston pump to the
Traction Drive Motor to allow the
Front Wheel to rotate freely when
towing or pushing the machine.
Traction
Drive
Motor
Front
Wheel
Electrical Schematic
1
F1
Battery
2
Fuse, 100A
1
Circuit Breaker, 15A
CB6
2
B
3
B1
K1
J2-1
Relay, Power
Driver Box
J1-10
J1-31
J1-11
R1
1
2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
J1-18
S1
Switch, Ignition
12 VDC
213
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Electrical Circuit Description
For the engine to start, the Driver Box must read a voltage through (rotary) Drive Pedal Sensor that’s within
the deadband range, indicating that the foot pedal is in the neutral position.
Once the engine is running, the Driver Box must read a voltage through Drive Pedal Sensor indicating that the
foot pedal has moved from the neutral position in order to actuate the scrub/sweep functions.
Hydraulic Diagrams
Traction Drive Motor in Neutral
When the foot pedal is in the neutral position
with the engine running, the Piston Pump is
not sending any oil to the Traction Drive Motor.
Traction
Drive
Motor
Piston
Pump
Tow Valve Engaged
When the engine is off, the Traction Drive
Motor acts like a hydraulic pump and makes
it difficult to rotate the front wheel. The
machine is equipped with a Tow Valve to
eliminate this problem when towing or
pushing the machine. When the Tow Valve is
engaged, the oil is free to flow to and from
the Traction Drive Motor through the Tow Valve
when the front wheel is rotated, bypassing the
Piston Pump.
Traction
Drive
Motor
Tow Valve
(engaged)
Piston
Pump
214
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Traction Drive Motor in Forward or Reverse
When the engine is running and the machine
is moving either forward or in reverse, the
Piston Pump is sending oil to the Traction
Drive Motor to drive the front wheel in the
appropriate direction.
Traction
Drive
Motor
Piston
Pump
Traction
Drive
Motor
Piston
Pump
Traction Motor Stalling Out
If the Traction Drive Motor is unable to run in
the forward direction for any reason (front
wheel stalled, etc.), the Forward Relief Valve
will open to allow oil to flow from and to the
Piston Pump, bypassing the Traction Drive
Motor to prevent damage to the hydraulic
components.
If the Traction Drive Motor is unable to run in
reverse, the Reverse Relief Valve will open to
bypass the Traction Drive Motor.
Forward Relief
Valve (3500 psi,
shown open)
Traction Drive
Motor (stalled)
Piston
Pump
Reverse Relief
Valve (2500 psi),
shown closed)
215
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Component Locations
Piston Pump, Hydroback
and Rotary Sensor
Piston
Pump
The Piston Pump is the blue pump
mounted directly in front of the
engine.
The Hydroback Centering Unit is
mounted on the left side of the
Piston Pump.
The Rotary Sensor (called the Drive
Pedal Sensor on the electrical
Rotary
Sensor
ladder diagram) is fastened to the
piston pump lever weldment.
Hydroback
Centering
Unit
Traction Drive Motor
The Traction Drive Motor is mounted
to the drive wheel weldment
underneath the front of the
machine.
Traction
Drive Motor
216
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key
switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Foot Pedal/Hydroback Neutral Adjustment
Note: When servicing the hydrostatic drive system, always check for any machine creeping
(movement) when the machine is in neutral with the engine running. The machine must not
move either forward or reverse after the foot pedal is released. If machine creeps in neutral,
or if you replace the Hydroback Centering Unit, pedal cable or Rotary Sensor, you will need to
set the hydrostatic drive neutral position, then recalibrate the neutral deadband setting.
1. Empty and remove the recovery tank to access the Hydroback Adjuster Plate.
Caution! Make sure to follow the instructions in the General Information/Jacking the Machine
section. Jack the machine at the designated locations only.
2. Block the rear wheels.
Piston
Pump
3. Jack up the front of
the machine until the
front drive wheel is off
the floor.
Rotary
Sensor
4. Place supports at the
front corners of the
machine.
5. Start the engine and
observe the direction
of the drive wheel
rotation.
Piston Pump
Lever
Weldment
5/16”-18 Hex
Head Screw (2)
Push/Pull
Control
Cable
Hydroback
Centering
Unit
6. Loosen the two 5/16”-
18 Hex Head Screws
holding the Hydroback
Adjuster Plate to the
chassis.
Adjustment
Screw
Hydroback
Adjuster
Plate
7. Loosen the jam nut and turn the Adjustment Screw clockwise or counterclockwise to move the Hydroback
Adjuster Plate and Hydroback Centering Unit as required to stop any wheel movement. The Piston Pump
Lever Weldment on the Piston Pump is now in the neutral position.
8. Tighten the two 5/16”-18 Hex Head Screws to secure the Hydroback Adjuster Plate to the chassis.
9. Tighten the jam nut on the Adjustment Screw.
10. Test the neutral adjustment by activating the foot pedal in both forward and reverse, then letting the
foot pedal return to the neutral position.
11. Readjust the Hydroback Adjuster Plate neutral position if the neutral setting is not repeatable. If you can’t
get a repeatable neutral position, replace the Hydroback Centering Unit and/or Push/Pull Control Cable as
necessary.
217
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
12. Check the maximum forward and reverse wheel speeds and adjust the pedal stops as necessary. Refer to
the Specifications/Propulsion Pump Circuits table in the Hydraulic System section for nominal wheel
speeds.
13. Turn the engine off, then see if it will restart. If engine will not start, the Rotary Sensor is probably out
of its neutral (deadband) range and needs to be recalibrated. See the Foot Pedal Neutral/Deadband
Adjustment section for programming instructions.
14. Lower the machine and reinstall the recovery tank.
Foot Pedal Neutral Deadband Adjustment
The resistance through the Rotary Sensor (rotary potentiometer) attached to the hydrostatic Piston Pump
linkage will vary with the position of the linkage. The Driver Box must see the resistance through the Rotary
Sensor within a particular range, called the neutral “deadband”, to confirm the Piston Pump is in neutral
before the Driver Box will allow the engine to start.
Once the engine is started, depressing the foot pedal moves the Rotary Sensor out of the deadband range.
When the Driver Box sees the resistance from the Rotary Sensor out of the deadband range, it activates the
various scrub/sweep functions.
Whenever you change or repair the foot pedal linkage components or the hydrostatic unit, or if you replace
the Rotary Sensor or Control Board (Driver Box), you will have to recalibrate the neutral deadband position
and set the sensitivity as follows:
1. Depress the foot pedal to the full reverse position, then allow the pedal to slowly return to its neutral
position. Do not move the pedal during the remainder of this procedure.
2. Press and hold the Engine Speed switch, then turn the ignition Key Switch to the run (on)
position. Continue to hold the Engine Speed switch until all the display panel lights turn off
(approximately three seconds), then release the switch.
• The first line of the LCD will read PEDAL CALIBRATION.
• The second line of the display will read Place Pedal in Neutral with an arrow to the left of
the line.
• The third line of the display will read Neutral Deadband.
3. Press the green Scrub On switch.
• The first line of the LCD
will read Neutral Set.
• The second line of the display will show the resistance value, in ohms, that the control
board is reading through the rotary sensor. Note that it’s normal for this value to drift a
little.
4. Press the green Scrub On switch to set the nominal deadband resistance value. The display will return
to the previous menu.
5. Press the Side Broom Down (-) switch to move the arrow to the left of the Neutral
Deadband line.
6. Press the green Scrub On switch to display the Neutral Deadband range menu. The
percentages shown are the limits the resistance from the rotary sensor can vary from
the Neutral Set (nominal) resistance and still be in the deadband range and allow the
engine to start.
218
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
7. Press the Side Broom Up (+) and Down (-) switches to scroll through the available
percentages.
Note: The ideal neutral deadband percentage range is one that allows reliable
starting, yet still actuates the scrub functions with minimal pedal travel.
• Increasing the percentage range will decrease the pedal neutral
position sensitivity, but will increase the pedal travel required to start
the scrub functions.
• Decreasing the percentage range will increase the pedal neutral position sensitivity, but
will decrease the pedal travel required to start the scrub functions.
The factory default value is 3%.
8. When the arrow is to the left of the desired percentage value:
• Press the green Scrub On switch to save the new percentage value. The display will
return to the previous menu.
• Press the red Scrub Off switch to return to the previous menu without changing the
percentage value.
9. Turn the Key Switch to the off position. The new settings will be saved and remain in effect
until they are changed again.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The machine
“creeps” forward or
backward when the
foot pedal is in the
neutral position.
The Hydroback neutral
position is out of adjustment.
Reset the Hydroback neutral position. Refer to
the Foot Pedal/Hydroback Neutral Adjustment
section.
The starter will not
crank the engine.
The Driver Box is failing
to see the Rotary Sensor
resistance in the deadband
and has sent a “start-inhibit”
signal to the relay PCB.
Note that in this condition, moving the drive pedal
out of the neutral position should allow the starter to
crank the engine.
Recalibrate the neutral deadband position and set
the sensitivity. Refer to the Foot Pedal Neutral
Deadband Adjustment section.
219
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Removal and Installation
Warning! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch
is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Push/Pull Control Cable Replacement
1. Lower the side broom(s).
2. Empty and remove the recovery tank.
Caution! Make sure to follow the instructions in the General Information/Jacking the Machine
section. Jack the machine at the designated locations only.
3. Block the rear wheels.
4. Jack up the front of
the machine. This
will make it easier
to access the Push/
Pull Control Cable and
mounting hardware
by the foot pedal
assembly.
5. From underneath the
machine, note the
position and spacing
of the two jam nuts
and star washer
holding the old Push/
Pull Control Cable in
the mounting fork by
the foot pedal. Loosen
the jam nuts and
remove the Push/Pull
Control Cable from the
mounting fork.
Piston
Pump
Piston Pump
Lever
Weldment
Rod End
Push/Pull
Control
Cable
Hydroback
Centering
Unit
Hydroback
Adjuster
Plate
6. Disconnect the rod end on the old Push/Pull Control Cable from the foot pedal assembly.
7. Loosen the locknut, then remove the rod end and locknut from the Push/Pull Control Cable.
8. Remove the two jam nuts and star washer from the old Push/Pull Control Cable. (This will make it easier
to remove the old Cable from the machine.)
9. Loosen the jam nut holding the old Push/Pull Control Cable and Hydroback Centering Unit in the mounting
fork by the Piston Pump.
10. Disconnect the Rod End from the Piston Pump Lever Weldment.
11. Loosen the locknut, then remove the Rod End and locknut from the old Push/Pull Control Cable.
12. Remove the four jam nuts and two star washers from the new Push/Pull Control Cable. (This will make it
easier to pull the new Cable through the machine.)
220
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Service Note: To thread the new Push/Pull Control Cable from the foot pedal assembly to the
Hydroback, we recommend that you SECURELY attach the new Cable to the old
Cable, then carefully pull the new Cable through the old Cable routing path in the
machine. This will eliminate a lot of disassembly and reassembly work.
13. Once the new Push/Pull Control Cable has been threaded through the machine, disconnect it from the old
Cable.
14. Reinstall the two jam nuts and star washer onto the pedal end of the Push/Pull Control Cable. Position the
jam nuts and star washer in the same location as noted in step 5 above.
15. Remove the red plastic thread protector sleeve from the new Push/Pull Control Cable, then install the
locknut and rod end onto the new Cable.
16. Reinstall the rod end into the foot pedal assembly.
17. Position the new Push/Pull Control Cable into the mounting fork by the foot pedal. Make sure the star
washer is located on the rear side of the mounting fork, then tighten the two jam nuts.
18. Reinstall one jam nut and a star washer onto the Hydroback end of the new Push/Pull Control Cable.
(Only one jam nut is needed to fasten the Cable and Hydroback Centering Unit to the Hydroback Adjuster
Plate.)
19. Remove the red plastic thread protector sleeve from the new Push/Pull Control Cable, then install the
Cable into the Hydroback Centering Unit. Note that the smaller end of the Cable will thread through
the rear of the Hydroback Centering Unit, and the larger threads on the outside of the Cable will thread
directly into the front of the Hydroback Centering Unit.
20. Install the locknut and Rod End onto the new Push/Pull Control Cable.
21. Reinstall the Rod End into the Piston Pump Lever Weldment.
22. Position the Push/Pull Control Cable and attached Hydroback Centering Unit into the Hydroback Adjuster
Plate by the Piston Pump. Make sure the star washer is located on the rear side of the Hydroback Adjuster
Plate and contacts the front of the Hydroback Centering Unit, then tighten the jam nut.
23. After installing a new Push/Pull Control Cable, set the foot pedal/Hydroback neutral position according to
the instructions in the Foot Pedal/ Hydroback Neutral Adjustment section.
221
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Hydroback Replacement
1. Empty and remove the recovery tank.
2. Loosen the jam nut
holding the Push/
Pull Control Cable and
Piston
Pump
Hydroback Centering
Unit in the Hydroback
Adjuster Plate by the
Piston Pump.
Piston Pump
Lever
Weldment
3. Disconnect the Rod
End from the Piston
Pump Lever Weldment.
4. Loosen the locknut
and remove the Rod
End and locknut from
the Push/Pull Control
Cable.
Rod End
Push/Pull
Control
Cable
5. Remove (unscrew)
the old Hydroback
Centering Unit from the
Push/Pull Control Cable.
Hydroback
Centering
Unit
Hydroback
Adjuster
Plate
6. Install the new Hydroback Centering Unit unit onto the Push/Pull Control Cable. Note that the smaller end
of the Cable will thread through the rear of the Hydroback Centering Unit and the larger threads on the
outside of the Cable will thread directly into the front of the Hydroback Centering Unit .
7. Reinstall the locknut and Rod End onto the Push/Pull Control Cable.
8. Reinstall the Rod End into the Piston Pump Lever Weldment.
9. Position the Push/Pull Control Cable and attached Hydroback Centering Unit into the Hydroback Adjuster
Plate by the Piston Pump. Make sure the star washer is located on the rear side of the Hydroback Adjuster
Plate and contacts the front of the Hydroback Centering Unit, then tighten the jam nut.
10. After installing a new Hydroback Centering Unit unit, set the foot pedal/Hydroback neutral position
according to the instructions in the Foot Pedal/ Hydroback Neutral Adjustment section.
222
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Traction Drive Motor Hose Routing
If the traction drive motor or the Hydraulic Hoses to the motor are replaced or repaired, it’s important to
route the Hydraulic Hoses correctly when reinstalled to prevent wear or damage to the Hydraulic Hoses and
surrounding components.
When reinstalling the traction drive motor Hydraulic Hoses:
1. Install the Hydraulic Hoses but leave the fittings loose on
both ends so the Hydraulic Hoses can pivot.
2. Turn the steering wheel all the way toward the left. The
fittings should be on the front side of the motor.
3. Make sure the Hydraulic Hoses are routed up and inside
the channel in the Drive Wheel Weldment as shown on
the right, and lie flat against the Bottom of the Frame as
shown below.
Hydraulic
Hoses
4. Make sure the Hydraulic Hoses are not twisted, then
tighten the fittings on both ends to 45 ft-lbs. Note that
the fittings must be tight to prevent loosening while
steering.
5. Turn the steering wheel all the way toward the left and
right several times to make sure the Hydraulic Hoses
don’t catch and are not rubbing against the surrounding
components.
Hydraulic
Hoses
Bottom of
the Frame
Drive Wheel
Weldment
223
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Specifications
Component Specifications
Component
Specifications
Tire (front 1) drive/steer
Size 18 in x 6 in [457 mm x 152 mm] P7 solid
Displacement – 18.3 CIR
Traction Drive Motor
Shaft Rotation – Clockwise (as viewed from slot end)
Displacement – 1.44 CIR
Speed – 3600 RPM Max.
Continuous Pressure – 3000 psi
Wheel Drive Piston Pump
Maximum Case Pressure – 25 psi
Relief Setting – 2500 psi/3500 psi
Charge Relief – 200-250 psi, high flow
224
Service Manual – SC8000
Wheel System, Traction
Wheel Drive System Torque Specifications
Description
Torque Specification
Steering
Castle
(Spindle) Nut
Torque to 40 ft.lb.,then loosen to
align cotter pin.
¾”-16 Hex
Jam Nut
Torque to 150 ft.-lb.
½”-20 x 1.25
Hex Screw
Use Loctite® 242,
torque to 90 ft.-lb.
½”-13 Nyloc
Hex Nut
™
Steering Castle
(Spindle) Nut
¾”-16 Hex
Jam Nut
Torque to 100 ft.-lb.
Drive Wheel
Motor Spindle
Nut
Torque to 375 ft.-lb.
(lubed) or 475 ft.-lb.
(dry), then tighten to
align cross hole.
Wheel Studs
Torque to 100 ft.-lb.
½”-13 Nyloc™
Hex Nut
½”-20 x 1.25
Hex Screw
Drive Wheel
Motor Spindle Nut
Wheel
Studs
225
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement